Panasonic WJ HD316A User Manual

Digital Disk Recorders

Operating Instructions

WJ-HD309A

Model Nos.

WJ-HD316A

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

ALARM

ERROR

STO

PLAY

SHIFT

PAU

ALARM

REC-

REC STOP

SUSPEND

SEQ

ALARM

RESET

PAN/

TILT

OSD

GOTO

LAST

REV

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

PULL

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

COPY

FWD

TEXT

A-B

REPEAT

OPERATE

MARK

SETUP

/ESC

HDD

10/0

IRIS

HDD

LISTED

–

LOGOUT

PRESET

/AUTO

BUSY

SET

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

316

Before attempting to connect or operate this product,

please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WAR-

RANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PAR-

TICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THE

THIRD PARTY’S RIGHT.

THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INAC-

CURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES

ARE ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN, AT ANY

TIME, FOR THE IMPROVEMENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION

AND/OR THE CORRESPONDING PRODUCT (S).

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY

IN NO EVENT SHALL MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRI-

AL CO., LTD. BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PER-

SON, EXCEPT FOR REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE

MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:

(3) UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFI-

CATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;

(4) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,

OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYS-

TEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY.

(5) ANY CLAIM OR ACTION FOR DAMAGES, BROUGHT

BY ANY PERSON OR ORGANIZATION BEING A PHO-

TOGENIC SUBJECT, DUE TO VIOLATION OF PRIVACY

WITH THE RESULT OF THAT SURVEILLANCE-CAMER-

A’S PICTURE, INCLUDING SAVED DATA, FOR SOME

REASON, BECOMES PUBLIC OR IS USED FOR THE

PURPOSE OTHER THAN SURVEILLANCE

(6) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,

ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE

IMPROPER DETECTION OR SLIP-UP IN DETECTION

BY VMD (Video Motion Detector) FUNCTION OF THE

PRODUCT.

(1) ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM-

ITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSE-

QUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR

RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;

(2) PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY

INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION

OF THE USER;

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that

produce heat.

9) Do not misuse the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A

grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your

safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being stepped on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenient receptacles and the points

where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a

cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.

S3125A

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,

such as when the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,

the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

PRECAUTIONS

• Refer all work related to the installation of these

products to qualified service personnel or system

installers.

• Built-in hard disk drives

Hard disk drives are vulnerable to vibration. Handle

them with care.

It is possible to damage them if they are moved while

their motors are still running. Do not move them just

after turning their power on or off (for around 30 sec-

onds).

When hard disk drive trouble occurs, replace it immedi-

ately. Consult your dealer for servicing.

When replacing the hard disk drives, take notice of the

following.

Do not detach the hard disk drives or the cables con-

necting the unit and the front cover while the

HDD1/HDD2 indicators are lit or for around 30 seconds

after the indicators go off.

• Do not operate the appliances beyond their speci-

fied temperature, humidity, or power source ratings.

Use the appliance at temperatures within +5°C -

+45°C (41°F - 113°F) and humidity below 85 %.

The input power source for this appliance is 120 V AC

60 Hz.

Performance and lifetime of hard disk drives are easily

affected by heat (used at high temperature) character-

istically. It is recommended to use this appliance at

temperatures within +20 °C - +30 °C (68 °F - 86 °F).

• Handle the appliance with care.

Do not strike or shake, as this may damage the appli-

ance.

Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

Do not stack them, or keep them upright.

Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 kgf · cm))

Avoid rapid changes of the temperature/humidity to

prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within

15°C/h (59°F/h))

• Do not strike or give a strong shock to the unit.

It may cause damage or allow water to enter the unit.

• Built-in backup battery

Before the first use, charge the built-in backup battery

(lithium battery) by turning on the power for 48 hours or

more.

If it is not charged enough, in a case where the power

goes down, the internal clock may keep bad time or the

operative condition may be different to that before the

electric power failure.

• Place the unit horizontally an a level surface. Do not

place the unit in an upright position. When stacking

multiple units, clear a space of more than 5 cm from

both sides, the top, the bottom and the rear of the units.

• Avoid placing receptacles that contain liquids such as

water near the unit.

The built-in battery life is approximately 5 years as an

indication of replacement. (This is just an indication of

replacement. We are not providing any guarantee of the

built-in battery lifetime. Replacement cost of the built-in

battery is not covered by the warranty even if it needs

to be done within the warranty period.) Ask the shop

where you purchased the unit when replacement of the

battery is required.

If liquid spills onto the unit, it may cause fire or an elec-

tric shock.

• Do not expose the unit to water or moisture, or try to

operate it in wet areas.

• Prevent condensation from forming on the surface of

the hard disk.

If this happens, do not turn on the power of the recorder

and leave the recorder for around 2 hours.

Wait until the dew evaporates in any of the following

cases:

• The recorder is placed in an extremely humid place.

• The recorder is placed in a room where a heater has

just been turned on.

• Cooling Fan

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it

may cause injuries.

Replacement costs of the cooling fan are not covered

by the warranty even if it needs to be done within the

warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

• The recorder is moved from an air-conditioned room

to a humid and high-temperature room.

• Cleaning

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it

may cause injuries.

Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when clean-

ing the appliance body.

Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty.

When the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent

and wipe gently.

• We recommend that you make a note of your settings

and save them. This will help when you are required to

change the system configuration, or when unexpected

trouble or failure occurs.

• Distributing, copying, disassembling, reverse compil-

ing, reverse engineering, and also exporting in violation

of export laws of the software provided with this prod-

uct, is expressly prohibited.

• Indication label

Refer to the indication labels placed on the top and bot-

tom of the unit as to the indications of equipment classi-

fication and power source, etc.

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS

• Adobe, Adobe logos, and Acrobat are registered trade-

marks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/

or other countries.

• Microsoft, Windows and Windows XP are registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or

other countries.

• Other names of companies and products contained in

these operating instructions may be trademarks or reg-

istered trademarks of their respective owners.

ABOUT THESE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

There are 3 sets of operating instructions for the WJ-

HD316A/WJ-HD309A as follows.

• Operating Instructions (book, these operating instruc-

tions)

• Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

• Network Setup Instructions (PDF)

Refer to the "Network Setup Instructions" on the provided

CD-ROM for descriptions of how to perform the required

settings and how to connect to other devices.

Adobe^®Reader is required to read these operating instruc-

tions (PDF) on the provided CD-ROM. When the Adobe^®

Reader is not installed on the PC, download the latest

Adobe^®Reader from the Adobe web site and install it.

These "Operating Instructions" contain descriptions of how

to operate this unit with the buttons on the front panel.

Refer to the "Network Operating Instructions" on the provid-

ed CD-ROM for descriptions of how to operate this unit

from a PC.

"WJ-HD300" or "HD300" shown in the illustrations used in

these operating instructions indicate this unit or the WJ-

HD300 series.

CONTENTS

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY .............................................. 3

MANAGEMENT OF USERS/HOSTS ............................... 66

OPERATING THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME ............. 68

Preparation for maintenance (HDD replacement,

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ................................... 3

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .......................... 4

PRECAUTIONS ................................................................ 5

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS ...... 6

ABOUT THESE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .............. 6

PREFACE ......................................................................... 8

FEATURES ....................................................................... 8

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND

THEIR FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 9

I Front View ................................................................... 9

I Rear View ................................................................... 11

I On Monitor 1 (To display only live image) .................. 12

I On Monitor 2 (To display live or recorded images) ..... 13

STARTUP ......................................................................... 17

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 18

SHUTDOWN ..................................................................... 19

RECORDING (Manual Recording) ................................... 20

RECORDING (Emergency Recording) ............................. 21

PLAYBACK ....................................................................... 22

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK ............... 25

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED TIME

installation, etc.) .............................................................. 69

INSTALLATIONS .............................................................. 71

Places to avoid ............................................................... 71

Rack mounting ................................................................ 71

CONNECTIONS ............................................................... 72

I Connections when the unit is used independently ...... 73

I Connections with an extension unit ............................ 74

I Connections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and

DVD-R drives .............................................................. 75

I Connections with the VCR .......................................... 76

I Connections with PS·Data systems ............................ 77

I Cascade connection of multiple units ......................... 79

I Connection with the RS485 camera ........................... 83

I Mode Switch ............................................................... 85

I RS485 Port ................................................................. 85

I How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM/

CONTROL Connector ................................................. 86

I How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM

Connector ................................................................... 90

I How to Use the SERIAL Connector ............................ 92

SETUP .............................................................................. 93

I About the SETUP MENU (Quick) ............................... 93

I Item list of the SETUP MENU (Quick) ........................ 93

I [Display] ...................................................................... 94

I [REC & Event] ............................................................. 97

I [Network] ................................................................... 100

I About the SETUP MENU (Advanced) ...................... 101

I Item list of the SETUP MENU ................................... 101

I Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU

AND DATE ........................................................................ 27

SEARCH AND PLAY ........................................................ 28

I Search for a Recording Event and Play it back

(Recording Event Search) .......................................... 28

I Search for Copied Recorded Images and Play it back

(Copy Data Search) .................................................... 32

I Search for a motion detected time and date from

the recorded images and play it (VMD search) .......... 36

I Search for a marked point and play from that point

(Marking search) ......................................................... 41

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES ................................................. 42

I Displaying Live Images on a Single Screen ............... 42

I Displaying on a Multi-screen ....................................... 43

I Sequential Display ...................................................... 44

CONTROL CAMERAS ..................................................... 45

I Panning/Tilting ............................................................ 45

I Zoom ........................................................................... 45

I Focus .......................................................................... 45

I Iris ............................................................................... 46

I Preset Action .............................................................. 46

I Auto Function (Auto Pan, etc) ..................................... 48

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION ..................................... 49

I Action at an event occurrence .................................... 49

I Cancel the Alarm Action ............................................. 51

I Suspend the Alarm Actions ........................................ 51

COPYING (Duplicate) ....................................................... 52

DELETE DATA ON THE DISK ......................................... 54

I Deletion of recorded images saved on the

hard disk manually ...................................................... 54

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK ....................... 56

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION ............................. 58

ERROR/WARNINGS ........................................................ 60

OPERATION USING A PC ............................................... 63

I Features ...................................................................... 63

I System Requirements of a PC ................................... 63

OPERATION OF THE UNIT IN THE CASCADE

(Advanced) ............................................................... 104

I [System] Settings on System .................................... 105

I [Recording] ............................................................... 111

I [Event] Function for Events ........................................114

I [Schedule] Settings for the recording/

event action schedule ............................................... 119

I [Switcher] Settings for the switcher function ............. 124

I [Display] .....................................................................127

I [Comm] Settings for communication with other

devices ...................................................................... 130

I [Maintenance] Functions for Maintaining .................. 135

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA .......................... 139

DISK MANAGEMENT ..................................................... 140

I Notes on the hard disk ...............................................140

I How to replace the built-in hard disk ..........................140

I About the HDD DISK MENU ......................................143

I Display of the HDD DISK MENU ...............................143

I RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit ......................144

I Formatting (Initialization) the Hard Disk .....................145

I Setting for Mirroring ...................................................149

SERIAL (RS232C) CONNECTOR COMMAND

REFERENCE .................................................................. 153

I SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol ............ 153

I Command Format ..................................................... 153

FLOWCHART OF THE SETUP MENU ........................... 163

PARAMETERS AND THE DEFAULT SETTINGS

OF THE SETUP MENU .................................................. 164

TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................... 172

SPECIFICATION ............................................................ 176

STANDARD ACCESSORIES ......................................... 177

CONNECTION .................................................................. 64

I Operation using the buttons on the front panel ........... 64

I Setup .......................................................................... 64

I Operation using the system controllers ...................... 65

PREFACE

The Digital Disk Recorders WJ-HD316A/309A are designed

for use within a surveillance system and are a combination

of a hard disk recorder and a video multiplexer (16-input for

the WJ-HD316A, 9-input for the WJ-HD309A).

The digital hard disk recorder is a recording device using a

hard disk drive to record camera pictures instead of using

videotapes so that pictures recorded by repeated overwrit-

ing will not experience deterioration of the recorded picture

quality. Up to 16 cameras can be connected to the WJ-

HD316A directly (up to 9 cameras to the WJ-HD309A) and

it is possible to record their camera pictures. It is also pos-

sible to display four or more camera pictures on a single

monitor, to switch camera pictures, and to operate cameras

using this unit.

FEATURES

Various Recording Functions

Remote Operation via Network

• Multi-Recording

It is possible to operate this unit using a PC connected to a

LAN (Local Area Network) or the Internet with the featured

network function.

It is possible to perform multiple recordings using a sin-

gle digital disk recorder even if the operating environ-

ments are different, for example, recording pictures of

cameras in different places at different times.

Security Function and Reliability

• Schedule recording

• Authentication function (registration of ID and pass-

word) allows users access to a predetermined selection

of the available functions. Up to 32 users can be regis-

tered.

It is possible to perform recording automatically at a

scheduled time on a designated day of the week.

Schedules can be set on each camera.

• Emergency Recording

• If alteration of a recorded image data is made for any

reason, the alteration alert function will announce it.

In the case of an emergency, emergency recordings

will be given a higher priority than other recording

modes by operating an external switch.

• If a hard disk crashes, the backup function^*1, the mirror-

ing function^*2and the RAID 5 function^*3prevent any

data loss.

• External Timer Recording

It is possible to perform recording automatically using

an external timer.

^*1: Only when the recommended DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R

drive or CD-R drive is used

^*2: The mirroring function does not work with an external

hard disk drive such as an extension unit.

^*3: To use the RAID 5 function, an optional extension unit is

required.

• Event Recording

At an event occurrence, such as when an alarm signal

is supplied, the recording mode (quality and recording

rate) can be changed to high quality to record pictures.

• Motion Detection Function (VMD)

It is possible to start recording automatically when

motion is detected in a shooting area.

Transmission with Coaxial Cable, PS·Data and

RS485 Compatible

• It is possible to control a Panasonic combination cam-

era such as the WV-CS850 using only a coaxial cable

but not other devices. Using a coaxial cable also com-

pensates for transmission loss.

• It is easy to establish the surveillance system by con-

necting a PS·Data compatible system controller and

peripherals.

Frame Switcher Function

• It is possible to display pictures of four or more cam-

eras on a single monitor (multi-screen) splitting the

monitor screen into 4, 7, 9, 10, 13, or 16 sections using

the WJ-HD316A, and into 4, 7, or 9 sections using the

WJ-HD309A.

While monitoring a multi-screen, each camera picture

will be displayed as a moving image.

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

I Front View

! ! @

! ! ! !

qweryui

@ @@

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

VIDEO

OUT

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

REPEAT

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

[WJ-HD316A]

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD

SET

BUSY

WJ-HD

! !!@ @ @ @ @

! ! @

! ! ! !

qweryui

@ @@

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

OSD

VIDEO

OUT

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

REPEAT

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

[WJ-HD309A]

COPY

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

AUDIO

OUT

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

HDD

SET

BUSY

!! @ @ @ @ @

q Operate Indicator (OPERATE)

Lights up when the power is turned on.

u HDD Access Indicators (HDD1/HDD2)

Blinks when the HDD1 or the HDD2 is accessed

respectively.

w Alarm Suspension Indicator (ALARM SUSPEND)

Lights up when the alarm suspension mode is selected.

i Monitor Switch button (MONITOR1/MONITOR2)

Pressing this button switches the monitor. This button

lights up when monitor 1 is selected, and goes off when

monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected.

e Alarm Indicator (ALARM)

Blinks when an alarm occurs, and lights steadily when

the activated alarm is reset automatically.

To turn this indicator off, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

o Shift Button (SHIFT)

Toggles the functions of the camera selection buttons.

r Alarm Reset Button (ALARM RESET)

Pressing this button cancels alarm activation, and

returns the system to the condition before the alarm

was activated.

! Camera Selection Buttons ([1] - [10/0], [11] - [16] for

the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A)

Pressing a button displays live or playback images of

the selected camera. The LED in the button indicates

the status as follows.

t Error indicator (ERROR)

Green: When a button is lit green, the currently dis-

played image on the monitor is live from the respec-

tive camera.

Blinks orange when an error occurs that will not keep

the unit from running.

Blinks red when an error occurs that may cause the

system to go down.

Orange: When a button is lit orange, the image from the

respective camera is recorded.

Refer to page 60 for further information about error/

warnings.

Blue: When a button is lit blue, the currently displayed

image on the monitor is live from the respective

camera and is also recorded.

y Timer Indicator (TIMER)

Lights up when the schedule recording is set, and

blinks while the schedule recording is being performed.

When the shift button is lit, these buttons work as the

toggled function buttons.

(The buttons available as the toggled function buttons

will light green when the shift button is lit.)

@ Set Button (SET)

Works differently depending on the situations listed

below:

• Plays recorded images at the current playback

speed when this button is pressed during fast play-

back.

• Registers preset positions of cameras.

• Activates the auto focus function.

• Resets the set iris.

! Pan, Tilt, Latest Recorded Image Playback Button

(PAN/TILT, GO TO LAST)

Pans/tilts the selected camera, or plays back the latest

recorded image.

(Refer to pages 45 and 23 respectively.)

• Sets the alarm suspension mode on/off.

• Determines the setting of parameters on the setup

menus.

! Zoom, Focus, A - B Repeat Button (ZOOM/FOCUS,

A-B REPEAT)

Zooms in/out, adjusts focus, or repeats playback of

recorded images between two designated points.

(Refer to pages 45 and 23 respectively.)

@ Jog Dial

Works differently depending on the situations as fol-

lows:

• Plays recorded images frame by frame when this

dial is rotated during pausing playback.

• Skips playback time when this dial is rotated during

playback at normal speed.

! Iris, Listing Button (IRIS, LISTED)

Adjusts iris, or enables/disables the filtering playback.

(Refer to pages 46 and 28 respectively.)

• Moves the cursor on the search menu or the thumb-

nail menu.

• Selects a parameter setting or a character on the

setup menus.

! Preset, Auto Function Button (PRESET/AUTO)

Moves a camera to the preset position, or activates the

auto function of the camera.

(Refer to pages 46 and 48 respectively.)

@ Shuttle Ring

! Stop Button (STOP)

Works differently depending on the situations as fol-

Stops playback.

lows:

• Plays fast when this ring is rotated during playback

at normal speed.

! Play/Pause Button (PLAY/PAUSE)

Plays recorded images, or pauses playback.

• Turns the search menu pages or the thumbnail

menu pages.

! Record Button (REC/REC STOP)

Starts recording. To stop recording, press this button

down for 2 seconds or more.

@ Connectors Cover

@ Copy Port (COPY2)

! Slow Button (PAN/TILT, SLOW)

Connect a recommended external recording device to

this port.

Pans/tilts the selected camera slowly.

! Search Button (SEARCH)

@ S-Video Output Connector (S-VIDEO)

Connect the S-video input connector of a VCR with this

connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be sup-

plied to this connector.

Displays the search menu.

@ Setup, Escape Button (SETUP/ESC)

Displays the setup menu, or turns back to the previous

page of the setup menu, etc.

@ Video Output Connector (VIDEO OUT)

Connect the video input connector of a VCR with this

connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be sup-

plied to this connector.

@ Busy Indicator (BUSY)

Lights when the selected camera was not available to

operate because another user is operating it using a

controller or a PC via a network. In this case, wait until

this indicator goes off.

# Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an

unbalanced –10 dBV, 600 Ω line output audio signal to

an external device.

@ Arrow Buttons (CDAB)

Adjusts zooming/focus, or moves the cursor on the

setup menus and the search menu.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector

during playback.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT

connector on the rear panel will be supplied to this con-

nector.

I Rear View

o ! ! ! !

e ! ! !

q w ty ui

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

[WJ-HD316A]

OUT

VIDEO

o ! ! ! !

e ! ! !

q w ty ui

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

[WJ-HD309A]

OUT

VIDEO

P S · D a t a

q Audio Input Connectors (AUDIO IN 1 - 4)

t Monitor Output Connectors (MONITOR OUT1, MONI-

TOR OUT2/CASCADE OUT)

These connectors, for RCA pin jacks, accept an unbal-

anced –10 dBV, 10 kΩ line input audio signal supplied

from an external device such as a microphone amplifi-

er.

Connect monitors to these BNC connectors. Refer to

page 72 for the important notice about the BNC cables

to be used.

The MONITOR OUT2 connector can also be used as

the CASCADE OUT connector.

w Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an

unbalanced –10 dBV, 600 Ω line output audio signal to

an external device.

When using two or more units of the WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A and using the MONITOR OUT2 connector as

the CASCADE OUT connector, connect with the CAS-

CADE IN connector of another WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector

during playback.

e Video Input Connectors (CAMERA IN 1 - 16 for the

WJ-HD316A/CAMERA IN 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A)

Connect system cameras or combination cameras to

these BNC connectors. Refer to page 72 for the impor-

tant notice about the BNC cables to be used.

A 75 Ω termination is made unless the video output ter-

minal is connected.

y Cascade In Connector (CASCADE IN)

Connect with the CASCADE OUT connector of another

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A when using two or more units

of the WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A.

u Serial Connector (SERIAL)

Connect a PC with this D-Sub 9-pin connector when

controlling this unit.

To connect combination cameras, connect them to the

CAMERA IN 1 - 8 connectors of the WJ-HD316A, or the

CAMERA IN 1 - 6 of the WJ-HD309A (accept coaxial

communication).

i Monitor Connector (MONITOR (VGA))

Connect a VGA monitor with this connector. The same

video signal supplied to the MONITOR OUT2 connector

will be supplied to this connector.

r Video Output Connectors (CAMERA OUT 1 - 16 for

the WJ-HD316A/CAMERA OUT 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309A)

o Alarm Connector (ALARM)

These BNC connectors supply video signals looped

through the video input connectors. Refer to page 72

for the important notice about the BNC cables to be

used.

Note: Video signals will not be supplied from the CAM-

ERA OUT 1 - 8 connectors if the power of the unit is

off.

Connect an external device such as a sensor or a door

switch with this D-Sub 25-pin connector.

! Alarm/Control Connector (ALARM/CONTROL)

Connect a control switch with this D-Sub 25-pin con-

nector when controlling this unit using an external

device, or when controlling an alarm device such as a

buzzer or a lamp.

Important:

! PS·Data Ports (DATA)

• The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor. (It is impossible to display the SETUP

MENU on monitor 1.)

Connect PS·Data compatible devices with these ports.

! Mode Switches (MODE)

• It will take around 2 minutes to display live images on

monitor 1 after turning on the power of the unit.

Set the operation mode of this unit with these dip

switches.

1. Camera Title

! RS485 Ports (RS485 (CAMERA))

Connect RS485 compatible combination cameras with

these ports.

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display the camera title can be selected

from the following.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is upper right (R-

UPPER).

! Network Port (10/100BASE-T)

Connect this unit to a network compatible with 10BASE-

T or 100BASE-Tx when controlling this unit using a PC

via a network.

Note: The camera title will be displayed with 16 charac-

ters (2 lines: 8 characters per line).

! Copy Port (COPY1)

Connect a recommended external recording device to

this port.

2. Time

Displays the current time (hour:minute:second) and

date (month:day:year).

A position to display the time can be selected from the

following.

! Extra Storage Port (EXT STORAGE)

Connect an optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series)

with this port.

Upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right

The default time display position is upper left (L-

UPPER).

! Power Switch (POWER)

Turns the power of this unit on and off.

Notes:

! Signal Ground Terminal (SIGNAL GND)

• When the camera title and the time display are lay-

ered, only the time display will be displayed.

• When monitor 1 is selected, it is possible to turn

on/off display of the camera title and the time by

pressing the camera selection button 8 for the WJ-

HD316A (the camera selection button 6 for the WJ-

HD309A) while the shift function is on (by pressing

the SHIFT button).

! Power Cord Inlet (AC IN)

Connect the power cord to this inlet.

@ Cable Clamp

Fix the cables with this cable clamp to prevent discon-

nection or unstable connections that may cause record-

ing failures or an unstable system.

3. Event Display

When an event has occurred, an event display will be

displayed.

I On Monitor 1 (To display only

The position of an event display will be symmetrical to

the position where the time is displayed. When the time

is displayed at the lower left of the screen, an event dis-

play will be displayed at the upper right corner of the

screen. The default position of an event display is the

upper right corner of the screen (R-UPPER).

The event display will be displayed differently as follows

depending on which event has occurred.

VMD-*: When motion is detected.

live image)

LOSS-*: When video loss has occurred.

COM-#: When a command alarm has occurred.

TRM-#: When a terminal alarm has occurred.

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for

the WJ-HD309A)

#: Alarm number

The negative circled numbers indicate the default positions

of camera title q, time w and event display e.

Note: Refer to page 49 for further information about

event types and event actions.

1. Camera Title

I On Monitor 2 (To display live or

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display the camera title can be selected

from the following.

recorded images)

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is upper right (R-

UPPER).

2. Task Bar

Displays the current status.

The task bar consists of the main bar (w - A), the left

bar (w- B), and the right bar (w- C).

There are 3 different ways to display the task bar as fol-

lows.

w– A

Mode 1

Displays only the main bar and the status is displayed

on it.

The negative circled number q indicates the camera title

default position.

Notes:

• The same images displayed on monitor 2 will be dis-

played on the VGA monitor.

• The camera title will be displayed with 16 characters (2

lines: 8 characters per line).

• When monitor 2 is selected, it is possible to switch the

way of displaying the camera title in the following order

by pressing the camera selection button 8 for the WJ-

HD316A (the camera selection button 6 for the WJ-

HD309A) while the shift function is on (by pressing the

SHIFT button):

Mode 2

Display the camera title → Display the camera title in

list form → Not display the camera title

Displays the status on the main bar, the left bar and the

right bar.

• When playing images recorded after selecting "ON" for

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)", the embedded abbre-

viation of the recording mode (event recording/emer-

gency recording) will be displayed.

The abbreviations are as follows:

EVT: Pre-/post-event recording

EMR: Emergency recording

• In case that "ON" is selected for "Embedded REC (Title)"

and also "R-UPPER" or "R-LOWER" is selected for the

camera title position, when playing images recorded

with the resolution setting "SIF", a part of the embedded

camera title may not be displayed.

Mode 3

Displays the status only on the main bar, and does not

display information on the left bar and the right bar.

Note: Mode 2 and Mode 3 are graphic operated. They

may not be as clear as Mode 1.

Important:

• Since the VGA output from this unit is the same as for

televisions (720 H x 480 V pixels/vertical frequency of

59.94 Hz), it may be possible that both the left and right

edges can not fit onto the screen depending on the

VGA monitor.

• It is impossible to use the MONITOR (VGA) connector

when connecting the unit in the cascade connection.

• It may take time to display live images on the VGA mon-

itor if the VGA monitor is turned on/off when the unit is

running.

ꢀ Status on the Task Bar

• On the Main Bar

qStatus Display Area

eLive/Playback Time Display Area

tError Display Area

wCopy/Delete Icons, Selected Disk,

Mirror/RAID Recovery Display Area

rAlarm Display Area

q Status Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Live

Indicates the live image display status

: Live image is displayed

: Live images are displayed

sequentially

Playback

Indicates that playback is currently being performed

with the displayed playback speed

5: Currently playing

4: Currently playing in reverse

h: Currently pausing

: Currently playing at fast speed

: Currently playing in reverse at fast

speed

Recording

Indicates that recording is currently being performed

Indicates that searching is currently being performed

: Currently recording

: Currently searching

w Copy/Delete Icons, Selected Disk, Mirror/RAID Recovery Display Area

Indicated Item

Copy

Status

Indication

Indicates that data copy is currently being performed

: Currently copying

Delete

Indicates that data deletion is currently being per-

formed

: Currently deleting data

Selected Disk

Indicates the selected disk

: Currently the HDD copy area is selected

: Currently the external recording device

connected to the COPY 1 port is selected

: Currently the external recording device

connected to the COPY 2 port is selected

RECOVER

Indicates that mirror/RAID recovery is currently being

performed

: Currently recovering mirror/RAID

e Live/Playback Time Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Time

Displays time and date of the displayed image

When displaying live image: Current time and

date

When playing recorded image: Time and date

when recorded

Month:Day:Year

Hour:Minute:Second

*: During summer time, an asterisk (*) will be dis-

played on the left side of the displayed time.

r Alarm Display Area

Indicated Item

Alarm

Status

Indication

Indicates that an alarm has occurred

VMD-*: When motion is detected

LOSS-*: When video loss has occurred

COM-#: When a command alarm has occurred

TRM-#: When a terminal alarm has occurred

Alarm type

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9

for the WJ-HD309A)

#: Alarm number

Alarm is occurring currently

Note: Refer to page 49 for further information about event types and event actions.

t Error Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Error Warning

Indicates an error occurrence or warning

ALT-*: Alteration is detected

W-ERROR: Failed to write data on the HDD

SMART: Warning of the HDD malfunction

H-METER: Set time for hour-meter (active time of

the HDD) warning has passed

Error type

THERMAL: The temperature inside the unit is too

high

Error is occurring currently

POWER: A power outage has been detected

#-nn%: Warning about running out of disk space

while displaying available disk space per-

centage

#-FULL: No available disk space

MEDIUM-n: An error occurred in an external

recording device

REMOVE: The hard disk is removed from the sys-

tem automatically because of an access error

FAN: The fan is faulty

HDD-ERROR: The hard disk designated as

image storage was not found

Abbreviation of partition

Status

Displayed

abbreviation

NML

EVT

CPY

Normal recording area

Event recording area

Copy area

External recording device

connected to the COPY1 port

on the rear panel

CP1

CP2

M-FAIL: Mirror recovery failed

R-FAIL: RAID recovery failed

External recording device

connected to the COPY2 port

on the front panel

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9

for the WJ-HD309A)

#: Abbreviation that indicates partition

nn: Available disk size

n: Number of connector that an external recording

device is connected to

Notes:

• Refer to page 60 for further information about error types and what to do when an error has occurred.

• The RAID recovery is a function of the optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series). Refer to the Operating Instructions of

the optional extension unit for further information about the RAID recovery.

• On the Left Bar

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Camera

Indicates recording and displaying status

Gray: Camera currently not displayed or not con-

nected to the respective channel

Green: Camera displayed on the monitor

Orange: Camera currently being recorded

Blue: Camera currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor

Camera 1 is on the top and camera

16 is on the bottom

• On the Right Bar

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Used disk space

Indicates the available disk space of each partition.

Top: 100 % of the disk space is being used (no

available disk space)

Second from the top: 80 % of the disk space is

being used

Center: 60 % of the disk space is being used

Second from the bottom: 40 % of the disk space

is being used

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Bottom: 20 % of the disk space is being used

Note: When "CONTINUE" is selected on the "Disk End

Mode" page of the "Maintenance" setup menu, the

available disk space will not be displayed. Refer

to a system administrator for further information.

NML: Available disk space of the normal record-

ing area used for manual recording and

schedule recording

EVT: Available disk space of the event recording

area used for event recording and emergency

recording

STARTUP

zInsert the power plug to an outlet (AC 120 V,

cEnter a user name and password.

60 Hz)

Note: Make sure the power source is AC 120 V, 60 Hz.

Important:

When using the optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300

series), turn on the power of this unit after turning on the

power of all extension units.

Rotate the jog dial to select a character to be entered in the

cursor position.

xTurn on the power switch on the rear panel.

The OPERATE indicator will light and the system check

(checking the system and hard disk) will start.

The startup splash image below will be displayed on moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor during the system check.

It is also possible to enter numbers by pressing the camera

selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9],

[0] for the WJ-HD309A).

To move the cursor, press the arrow buttons.

Use the same method to enter or edit characters attached

to images. Refer to page 59 for further information.

Notes:

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name: ADMIN

Password: 12345

• To enhance the security, change the password for an

administrator before starting to run the unit. It is recom-

mended to change the password for an administrator

periodically.

• To log out, press the LOGOUT button after confirming

that the SHIFT indicator is lit.

When the auto login is off, the login window will be dis-

played if any button on the front panel of this unit is pressed

after the system check. (Go to step 3)

When the auto login is on, live images will be displayed

after the system check.

vDisplay a live image.

Notes:

Press the SET button to display a live image.

If the authentication (login) window is displayed, enter the

user name and password.

When authenticated, a live image will be displayed.

When not authenticated, the authentication (login) window

will be displayed again.

• If the hard disk configuration was changed after the last

startup or the hard disk has problems, the HDD DISK

MENU will be displayed automatically after the startup

splash. (Refer to page 143 for further information.)

• It is possible to display the disk configuration menu by

pressing the SET button when the image shown below,

that says the system check has been completed, is dis-

played.

Important:

The startup splash window will not be displayed on

monitor 1.

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

It is recommended to check the clock periodically and put

the clock right if it shows the wrong time.

cMove the cursor to "SET" and press the SET

button.

Adjust the clock when displaying a live image.

Note: The following are the descriptions of how to adjust

the clock on the SETUP MENU (Quick). Refer to page

106 for descriptions of how to adjust the clock on the

SETUP MENU (Advanced).

The set time will be applied.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

Advanced Menu

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

vPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more.

xc c x

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will disappear and a live image

will be displayed.

Important:

zPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after set-

ting the clock.

more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

xMove the cursor to "Time & Date" using the

arrows button (C D A B), and set the time

(Month, Day, Year, Time) using the jog dial.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

SHUTDOWN

To shutdown the unit, do the following.

When recording is being performed, press the REC button

for 2 or more seconds. Recording will stop and the indica-

tor on the REC button will go off.

When playback is being performed, press the STOP button.

Playback will stop and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will go off.

Turn off the power of the unit after confirming that the HDD1

and HDD2 indicators are off.

Important:

• Detach the plug from the outlet if not operating the unit

for a length of time.

• When the unit has not been used for a certain period,

turn on the power of the unit (approximately once a

week), and perform recording/playback to prevent

interferences with functions.

RECORDING (Manual Recording)

Do the following to record manually.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings

for manual recording.

When recording with higher priority than manual recording

is performed, manual recording will not be performed until

this recording finishes.

Refer to the following about the recording mode.

xStop recording.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

Press the REC button down for around 2 seconds.

The indicator on the button will go off and recording will

stop.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Notes:

• The camera selection button will light orange (currently

recording) or blue (currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor) to indicate which camera is

being recorded.

• When recording with other recording modes being per-

formed, the indicator on the REC button will not go off

even though the REC button is pressed to stop manual

recording.

• Manual recording will be stopped for a camera channel

when the supply of the video input signals to the cam-

era channel is stopped. When the supply of the video

input signals to the camera channel is resumed, manual

recording will be performed automatically.

zStart recording.

Press the REC button to start recording.

The indicator on the button will light and recording will start.

Images from all the connected cameras will be recorded

with the default setting.

It is possible to record only images displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor by changing the settings.

ꢀ Recording Mode and Priority

There are 4 recording modes as follows.

Recording Mode

Emergency Recording

Event Recording

Manual Recording

Schedule Recording

Description

Priority^*1

Start recording manually using an external switch at an emergency event occurrence Highest

Recording will be performed automatically at an event occurrence

Start and stop recording manually

1^*2

2^*2

3^*2

Recording will be performed automatically with a designated start/stop time and date

*1: Priorities on the above table are the default settings. (Emergency recording is the highest priority.)

*2: Priorities for manual recording, schedule recording and event recording can be changed. Refer to a system administrator

about the settings.

RECORDING (Emergency Recording)

Record manually using an external switch at an emergency

event occurrence.

For example, install an external switch at the reception

counter, and start recording with it when a suspicious indi-

vidual appears.

• When starting emergency recording while another

recording with a different recording mode (except event

recording) is being performed, the indicator on the REC

button will remain lit and the other recording will resume

after the emergency recording has finished.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings

for emergency recording.

ꢀ Recording duration of emergency

External switch

recording

Recording duration of emergency recording can be set as

follows. Refer to a system administrator for further informa-

tion.

Parameter

Recording Duration

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

1 s - 10 s

Record for the selected time (1 - 10 sec-

onds, can be set in 1 second intervals)

Record for 20 seconds

Record for 30 seconds

Record for the selected time (1 -10 min-

utes can be set in 1 minute intervals)

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

20 s

30 s

1 min - 10 min

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

20 min - 60 min Record for the selected time (20 - 60 min-

utes, can be set in 10 minutes intervals)

MANUAL

Record only while the external switch is

being pressed down

zPress the external switch.

The indicator on the REC button will light and recording will

start.

With the default setting, recording will be performed for 10

seconds.

(Record for at least 8 seconds)

Record until the ALARM RESET button is

pressed

CONTINUE

Emergency recording is the highest priority. Emergency

recording will be performed even when this unit is record-

ing in other recording modes.

xStop recording.

When the recording duration set in advance has passed,

recording will stop automatically.

With the default setting, recording will stop automatically

after recording for 10 seconds.

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Recording Time" of

"Emergency REC" on the SETUP MENU (Recording), press

the ALARM RESET button to stop recording.

The indicator on the REC button will go off and recording

will stop.

Notes:

• The camera selection button will light orange (currently

recording) or blue (currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor) to indicate which camera is

being recorded.

PLAYBACK

It is possible to play recorded images without stopping

recording.

The playback images will be displayed on monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

xStart playback.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and the

recorded images of the selected camera will be played.

[WJ-HD316A]

First playback after login: The latest recorded image will

be played.

c x

With the default setting, playback will start 5 seconds

before the start time of the latest recorded image. The

start time can be selected from the following:

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/5 min

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Refer to a system administrator about the settings.

Other than those above: Playback will start from the end

[WJ-HD309A]

point of the recorded image played last time.

c x

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

cStop playback.

Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

zSelect the camera respective to the recorded

images to be played. (Go to step 2 if not neces-

sary)

Press the desired camera selection button.

The pressed camera selection button will light green or

blue and the respective live images will be displayed.

ꢀ Available functions during playback

Pause

Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button to pause playback. While pausing,

the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will blink.

PLAY

PAUSE

Pressing this button again will resume playback.

Single frame skip

Rotating the jog dial during pause will skip to the next or previous

frame.

REV

FWD

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the next frame and rotating

it counterclockwise will skip to the previous frame.

–

Fast forward/Fast reverse

Hold playback speed

Skip

Rotating the shuttle ring will change the playback speed (1/2x, 1x, 2x,

5x, 10x, 20x) according to rotated degree. When the shuttle ring is

held in the 20x position (rotated to the end) for 5 seconds, the play-

back speed will be 50x. When the shuttle ring is held 5 more seconds

after the playback speed became 50x, the playback speed will be

100x.

Rotating the shuttle ring clockwise will play images at a faster speed

and rotating it counterclockwise will play images in reverse at a faster

speed.

REV

FWD

–

To play at normal speed, release the shuttle ring.

Press the SET button while holding the rotated shuttle ring to hold a

desired playback speed. (Playback speed will be held even though

the shuttle ring is released.)

REV

FWD

–

To return to the normal playback speed, press the SET button.

SET

Rotating the jog dial during playback will skip to the next or previous

recorded image.

REV

FWD

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the start time of the next

recording and start playback, and rotating it counterclockwise will

skip to the start time of the previous one. (Rotating the jog dial coun-

terclockwise at a point shortly after the start time of the recording will

skip to the start time of the previous recording).

–

If there is no next or previous recorded image, current playback will

continue.

Play the latest recorded image

Press the GO TO LAST button to play the latest recorded image.

When the GO TO LAST button is pressed for 2 seconds or more while

displaying live images, playback of the latest recorded images will

start.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

When the GO TO LAST button is pressed during recoding, it may hap-

pen that playback starts from not the latest recording time.

Multi-screen display

It is possible to display recorded images in multi-screen format

(4/7/9/10/13/16 for the WJ-HD316A, 4/7/9 for the WJ-HD309A).

q Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

w Press a camera selection button (1 - 6 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 3 for

the WJ-HD309A) to select a desired multi-screen.

Camera selection button 1: 4-split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7-split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9-split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD316A)

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD309A)

Camera selection button 5: 10-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 6: 13-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

e To display recorded images on a single screen, press the SHIFT

button again.

After the SHIFT indicator goes off, press the camera selection but-

ton.

Marking

It is possible to play from a marked point. Do the following to mark a desired

point.

MARK

1. Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

2. Press the camera selection button 12 (9 for the WJ-HD309A) (MARK) at a

desired point to be marked during playback.

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD316A)

(For the WJ-HD309A)

Up to 100 points can be marked. When more than 100 points are marked,

the older marked points will be overwritten by the newer marked points. In

this case, the oldest marked point is the first to be overwritten.

When marked while displaying in multi-screen, the same number of split

screens will be counted as marked points. (When a point is marked while

displaying a 16-split screen, 16 points will be marked simultaneously.)

Text display

It is possible to display text information attached to a recorded image during

playback.

Text display is available only when playing on a single screen.

qPause playback.

wPress the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

ePress the camera selection button 11 (5 for the WJ-HD309A) (TEXT).

TEXT

SHIFT

(For the WJ-HD316A)

(For the WJ-HD309A)

A - B repeat playback

It is possible to play recorded images between two designated points repeat-

edly.

A-B

REPEAT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

qDesignate a start point (A) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button during

playback.

The A - B REPEAT indicator will light, and the time of point A will be dis-

played.

Blink: During the A-B repeat playback

Light: When designating a start point (A)

Time of point A

To cancel the designated point, press the SETUP/ESC button.

wDesignate an end point (B) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button during

playback.

When the start point and the end point are set, the A - B REPEAT indicator

will start blinking.

Playback between point A and B will start and keep playing repeatedly.

The time of point A and B will be displayed during playback.

Time of point A and B

ePress the A - B REPEAT button during A - B repeat playback to return to

normal playback.

Note: When the clock of the unit has been changed by editing the time

and date settings or by the auto time adjustment function, overlapping

of the time ranges of the images recorded before and after the time

adjustment could occur.

In this case, the A-B repeat playback may not function properly.

Notes:

• Playback will be paused if the playback time caught up with the recording time (present time) when recording and play-

back are performed simultaneously.

• When playing images recorded at a high recording rate, unsteady playback speed and audio break-up may occur.

• A black screen may sometimes be displayed during fast playback/fast reverse playback. This is a normal operation.

PLAYBACK IMAGE ON A DESIGNATED DISK

Images from a camera will be recorded on the built-in hard

disk or external recording devices (DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R

drive or CD-R drive) connected to this unit.

Notes:

• Playback images will be displayed only on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

Available disk areas are as follows.

• Playback can be performed during recording.

• When a pre-recording area is created in an optional

extension unit, it is possible to play the images record-

ed on the pre-recording area.

• Disk space size of each recording area differs depend-

ing on the settings.

Note: External recording devices can be used as a copy

area for images recorded on the hard disk. It is impos-

sible to record images on the external recording

devices directly.

HDD Normal Recording Area/Event Recording Area:

Recording area in the built-in hard disk of this unit.

Recorded images by manual recording (page 20) or

event recording will be stored in this area. There are 3

ways to search for a recorded image and play it when

"HDD normal area" or "event recording area" is selected

as the recording area.

Refer to a system administrator for further information.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording

event search) (page 28)

• Search for a motion detected time and date from

the recorded images and play it (VMD search)

(page 36)

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

• Search for a marked point and play it (Marking

search) (page 41)

z x

[WJ-HD309A]

HDD Copy Area: Recording area in the built-in hard disk of

this unit. Recorded images will be copied in this area.

There are 2 ways to search for a recorded image and

play it when "HDD copy area" is selected as the record-

ing area.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording

event search) (page 28)

SET

BUSY

• Search for a motion detected time and date from

the recorded images and play it (VMD search)

(page 36)

z x

COPY 1/COPY 2: Recording area in the external recording

device (DVD-RAM disk, DVD-R disk, CD-R disk) con-

nected to the COPY 1 port or the COPY 2 port of the

unit. Recorded images will be copied in this area.

To search for a recorded image and play it when

"COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected as the recording area.

• Search for copy data and play it back (Copy Data

Search) (page 32)

zPress the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

xPress the camera selection button 9 (7 for the

WJ-HD309A) (DISK SELECT).

The DISK SELECT window will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

Built-in hard disk

DISK SELECT

HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA

Recording area for

manual recording

and schedule

HDD COPY AREA

COPY 1

COPY 2

Normal recording area

Event recording area

recording

Recording area for

event recording

and emergency

recording

CANCEL

Recording area for

copying

Copy area

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

n b

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.19.04 2:29:00 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

TOTAL

SET

BUSY

COPY DATA

bPress the PLAY/PAUSE button to play the

c c cv

selected recorded image.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and play-

back will start.

cSelect a disk to be played using the jog dial

and move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows

button. Press the SET button to determine the

selection.

Notes:

• When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, audio will not

be heard.

• When "COPY1" or "COPY2" is selected, the reload

speed of recorded images may become slow during

playback of images recorded at a high recording rate.

DISK SELECT

HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA

HDD COPY AREA

COPY 1

COPY 2

nTo stop playback, press the STOP button.

CANCEL

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will stop.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

When "HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA"

is selected, the recording event list window will be dis-

played. (Refer to page 28 for further information about the

recording event list window.)

When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, the copy data list

window will be displayed. (Refer to page 32 for further infor-

mation about the copy data list window.)

Note: Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button after stopping play-

back will start playback from the end point of the

recorded image played last time.

To close the DISK SELECT window, move the cursor to

select "CANCEL" and press the SET button.

Important:

In the following cases, the recording event list

window/copy data list window will not be displayed

even when you move the cursor to "OK" and press the

SET button after selecting any of "HDD COPY AREA",

"COPY 1" or "COPY 2":

• When another user has selected the same area

• When copying is being performed manually in the

same area using a PC via a network

vRotate the jog dial to select a desired recorded

image to be played.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

PLAYBACK FROM A DESIGNATED TIME AND DATE

Note: This feature is available only when "HDD NORMAL/

cPress the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and start

playback from the entered time and date.

EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with

the DISK SELECT window. When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2"

is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page

25 for further information about the DISK SELECT win-

dow.

If there is no recorded image after the entered time:

When there are images recorded after the entered time, the

oldest recorded image after the entered time will be played.

When there are no images recorded after the entered time,

the newest recorded image before the entered time will be

played.

It is possible to play recorded images from a designated

time and date without stopping recording.

Playback images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

v c

vPress the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

stop playback.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

z x

zPress the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

time and date designation window is dis-

played.

The time and date designation window will be displayed on

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

START

JAN

00 AM

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

xEnter the start time using the jog dial and the

arrows button.

Select the time and date using the jog dial. To move the

cursor, use the arrows button (A B).

START

FEB

00 AM

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

SEARCH AND PLAY

There are 3 ways to search for a recorded image and play it when "HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is

selected with the DISK SELECT window.

• Search for a recording event and play it (Recording event search) (see below)

• Search for a motion detected time and date from the recorded images and play it (VMD search) (page 36)

• Search for a marked point and play it (Marking search) (page 41)

When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected with the DISK SELECT window, the following is available.

• Search for copied recorded images and play it back (Copy Data Search) (page 32)

Note: Playback images will be displayed on a single screen on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. To play in a multi-screen,

switch to a multi-screen after starting playback.

I Search for a Recording Event and Play it (Recording Event Search)

Note: This feature is available only when "HDD NORMAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with the DISK

SELECT window. When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page 25 for further informa-

tion about the DISK SELECT window.

Display a list or a thumbnail of recording events, and select the desired recording event from them to play it.

It is possible to search using the following filters:

Search Filters

TIME & DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

Search for only images recorded in the entered time range.

Search for only recorded images from the selected camera channel.

Search for only images recorded in the selected recording mode.

It is possible to search for images recorded in the following recording modes:

EMERGENCY: Emergency recording (Refer to page 21.)

VMD:

Event recording performed when motion was detected.

TERMINAL:

Event recording performed when a terminal alarm was detected.

COMMAND: Event recording performed when a command alarm was detected.

VIDEO LOSS: Event recording performed when video loss occurred.

MANUAL:

Manual recording (Refer to page 20.)

SCHEDULE: Schedule recording (Refer to page 119.)

Search for only images recorded with text information.

TEXT

ꢀ Recording Event List Window

Search filter buttons

Filter cancel button

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

Recording event

Text information

Camera channel

Time and date

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

100

Time range of the listed data

Number of the listed data

Search information

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Search filter buttons:

Filter cancel button:

Time and date:

Selects the search filter

Cancels the selected search filter and lists all recording events

The time when recording started will be displayed.

The time when motion was detected will be displayed.

The time when the point was marked will be displayed.

The camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of

the displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen.

The recording mode will be displayed.

The first several characters of text information will be displayed if the image has text

information.

Camera channel:

Recording event:

Text information:

Time range of the listed data:

Number of the listed data:

Search information:

The time range of the listed data will be displayed.

The number of the listed data will be displayed.

The search filter will be displayed. (A filter of the currently displayed list will be dis-

played in orange.)

ꢀ Recording Event Thumbnail Window

Time and date

Camera channel/Recording event

Number of the listed data

Time and date:

The time when recording started will be displayed.

The time when motion was detected will be displayed.

The time when the point was marked will be displayed.

Camera channel/Recording event: The camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of

the displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen. The recording mode

also will be displayed.

Number of the listed data:

The number of the listed data will be displayed.

Notes:

• Some images displayed in the thumbnail window may not match with their respective displayed recorded time due to play-

ing of compressed recorded images.

• When the clock of the unit has been changed by editing the time and date settings or by the auto time adjustment function,

overlapping of the time ranges of the images recorded before and after the time adjustment could occur. In this case, the

thumbnail display may not function properly.

xUse the arrows button (A B) to select a search

filter (TIME & DATE, CAMERA, REC EVENT,

TEXT), and press the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

BUSY

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

z z x

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

zPress the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

recording event list window is displayed.

When a search filter is selected, the respective search filter

window will be displayed.

Select "UNLOCK FILTER" and press the SET button to can-

cel the selected filter.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

Refer to page 28 about search filters.

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

The recording event list window will be displayed on moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying

the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

To search using a search filter, go to step 4.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Filter recording events by the recording event

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REC EVENT FILTERING

EMERGENCY OFF

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

VMD

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

TERMINAL ON

COMMAND ON

VIDEO LOSS ON

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

MANUAL

SCHEDULE

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

c c c

Move the cursor to select the recording event (refer to page

28) using the arrows button (C D) and rotate the jog dial to

ON.

cFilter recording events.

Filter recording events by time and date

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording events of the selected filter will be listed.

TIME&DATE FILTERING

START

Filter recording events by text information

JAN

END

TEXT FILTERING

WITHOUT TEXT

JAN

SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog

dial to enter the time and date.

Press the SET button to determine the entered time and

date.

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

The recording event in the entered time range will be listed

and displayed.

Rotate the jog dial to select OFF, WITH TEXT or WITHOUT

TEXT.

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording events filtered by the selected filter will be

listed.

Filter recording events by camera channel

CAMERA FILTERING

CAMERA

vRotate the jog dial to select the recording

event to be played.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

Select camera channel numbers (1 - 16 for the WJ-

HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A) using the arrows button

to move the cursor, and rotate the jog dial to apply filtering.

It is possible to select camera channels using the camera

selection buttons [1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A ([1] - [9] for

the WJ-HD309A).

The selected camera channels will turn white.

Press the SET button to determine the selection of camera

channel numbers.

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

It is possible to turn the page by rotating the shuttle ring.

bPress the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The recording events of the selected camera channels will

be listed.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording

event will start.

Note: When operating the system controller, select a cam-

era channel using the numeric keypad. In this case, it is

impossible to select 10 CH to 16 CH.

Note: When the LISTED indicator is lit, only listed recording

events are available to be played. Press the LISTED

button during playback to make all recording events

available to be played.

Important:

In the recording event list, the start time of recording

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

will be displayed.

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

When events occurred successively, the contents of the

event log and the recording event list will not always

match since the unit continues to record the first occur-

ring event.

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

nTo stop playback, press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

I Search for Copied Recorded Images and Play it back (Copy Data

Search)

Note: This feature is available only when "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected with the DISK SELECT window. When "HDD NOR-

MAL/EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page 25 for further information

about the DISK SELECT window.

Display a list or a thumbnail of copied recorded images (Copy Data), and select the desired copy data file from them to play it.

It is possible to search using the following filters:

Search Filters

TIME & DATE

CAMERA

Search for only images recorded in the entered time range.

Search for only recorded images from the selected camera channel.

ꢀ Copy Data List Window

Search filter buttons

Filter cancel button

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

Camera channel

Time and date

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

Number of the listed data

(Always "--" is displayed.)

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Search filter buttons:

Filter cancel button:

Time and date:

Selects the search filter

Cancels the selected search filter and lists all copy data file

The time when recording of the source of the copied recorded images had started will

be displayed.

Camera channel:

The camera channel of the copy data file will be displayed. The recorded image of the

displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen.

ꢀ Copy Data Thumbnail Window

Time and date

Camera channel

Number of the listed data

(Always "--" is displayed.)

Time and date:

Camera channel:

The time when copying of the recorded images had started will be displayed.

The camera channel of the copy data file will be displayed. The recorded image of the

displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen. The recording mode also

will be displayed.

Notes:

• Some images displayed in the thumbnail window may not match with their respective displayed recorded time due to play-

ing of compressed recorded images.

• When no image file was found for the searched time and date, the displayed time and date on the list/thumbnail window

may not matchthe start time of the recorded images to be played.

• If the copy completion is not performed for the CD-R/DVD-R disk, it is impossible to search/play copied recorded images

on the CD-R/DVD-R disk.

Refer to page 53 for further information about the copy completion.

• When the clock of the unit has been changed by editing the time and date settings or by the auto time adjustment function,

overlapping of the time ranges of the images recorded before and after the time adjustment could occur. In this case, the

thumbnail display may not function properly.

xUse the arrows button (A B) to select a search

filter (TIME & DATE, CAMERA), and press the

SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

BUSY

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.19.04 2:29:00 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

z z x

TOTAL

COPY DATA

zPress the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

copy data file list window is displayed.

When a search filter is selected, the respective search filter

window will be displayed.

Select "UNLOCK FILTER" and press the SET button to can-

cel the selected filter.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.19.04 2:29:00 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

Refer to page 28 about search filters.

TOTAL

COPY DATA

The copy data file list window will be displayed on monitor

2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying

the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

To search using a search filter, go to step 4.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.19.04 2:29:00 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

TOTAL

COPY DATA

vRotate the jog dial to select the recording

n b

event to be played.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.19.04 2:29:00 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

c c c

TOTAL

COPY DATA

cFilter copy data files.

Filter copy data files by time and date

It is possible to turn the page by rotating the shuttle ring.

TIME&DATE FILTERING

bPress the PLAY/PAUSE button.

START

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording

event will start.

JAN

END

JAN

SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

nTo stop playback, press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog

dial to enter the time and date.

Press the SET button to determine the entered time and

date.

The copy data file in the entered time range will be listed

and displayed.

Filter copy data files by camera channel

CAMERA FILTERING

CAMERA

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

Select camera channel numbers (1 - 16 for the WJ-

HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A) using the arrows button

to move the cursor, and rotate the jog dial to apply filtering.

It is possible to select camera channels using the camera

selection buttons [1] - [16] for the WJ-HD316A ([1] - [9] for

the WJ-HD309A).

The selected camera channels will turn white.

Press the SET button to determine the selection of camera

channel numbers.

The recording events of the selected camera channels will

be listed.

Note: When operating the system controller, select a cam-

era channel using the numeric keypad. In this case, it is

impossible to select 10 CH to 16 CH.

The result list of the VMD search will be displayed on moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor.

(The list in the displayed window is of the results of the pre-

vious search.)

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying

the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

I Search for a motion detected

time and date from the recorded

images and play it (VMD search)

Note: This feature is available only when "HDD NORMAL/

EVENT AREA" or "HDD COPY AREA" is selected with

the DISK SELECT window. When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2"

is selected, this feature is not available. Refer to page

25 for further information about the DISK SELECT win-

dow.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

CAM

AUG.20.04 3:07:28 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:27 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:26 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:22 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:21 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:20 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:19 PM

01ch

Search for a motion detected time and date from all the

images recorded in all the recording modes, and display a

list or a thumbnail of the results.

AUG.20.04 3:07:28 AM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 AM

TOTAL

200

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Select a time and date displayed on the result list or thumb-

nail to play it.

It is possible to filter by camera channel, time and date,

detection area or search mode, to list the time and date of

events that were recorded when motion was detected.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

zPress the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

VMD search list is displayed.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

CAM

AUG.20.04 3:07:28 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:27 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:26 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:22 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:21 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:20 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:19 PM

01ch

AUG.20.04 3:07:28 AM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 AM

TOTAL

200

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

The motion detection area setup window will be displayed.

To search using the same conditions as the previous

search, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Go to step 13 when the VMD search is performed and a list

of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button is

pressed.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Note: If no image was recorded in the time range set in

step 3, the motion detection area setup window will not

be displayed when the SET button is pressed.

cn xvn cb

xPress the SET button.

bRotate the jog dial to select "SETUP AREA" on

the status bar.

SELECT CAMERA & DATE

CAMERA

CAM1

START

JAN

END

JAN

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

The VMD search window will be displayed.

Enter a camera channel number and time range on the

VMD search window for the VMD search.

To search using the same conditions as the previous

search, press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Note: It is possible to set all displayed areas as motion

detection areas by pressing the SET button after select-

ing "ALL AREAS".

Go to step 13 when the VMD search is performed and a list

of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button is

pressed.

nMove the cross cursor using the arrows button

to a point to be determined as the start point of

the motion detection area.

cMove the cursor using the arrows button and

rotate the jog dial to enter the camera channel

number and time range for the VMD search.

SELECT CAMERA & DATE

CAMERA

CAM1

START

JAN

END

JAN

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the

start point of the motion detection area.

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

vPress the SET button.

.Move the cross cursor to the motion detection

area to apply the sensitivity using the arrows

button (D C A B).

⁄

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

m. m,⁄ ,⁄⁄

mMove the cross cursor using the arrows button

to a point to be determined as the end point of

the motion detection area.

⁄Select the sensitivity using the jog dial from

the following.

OFF: Motion will not be detected

LOW: Low sensitivity

MID: Standard sensitivity

HIGH: High sensitivity

Note: Depending on the set positions of each motion

detection area, the sensitivity parameters for the motion

detection areas may be displayed overlapped with

each other.

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the

end point of the motion detection area.

It is possible to set up to 4 motion detection areas by

repeating steps 6 and 7.

⁄After completing the sensitivity settings for the

detection areas by repeating steps 9 and 10,

press the SETUP/ESC button.

,Press the SET button after selecting "SENSI-

TIVITY" by rotating the jog dial.

⁄Press the SET button after selecting "VMD

MODE" by rotating the jog dial.

Notes:

• Depending on the set positions of the detection areas,

the sensitivity indications of the detection areas may be

displayed overlapping each other.

• Depending on the set position of the detection area, a

part of the sensitivity indication of the detection area

may not be displayed.

⁄After selecting "EXIT" by rotating the jog dial,

press the SET button or the PLAY/PAUSE but-

ton to start searching and display the results

of the VMD search.

⁄ ⁄⁄ ⁄

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

⁄ ⁄⁄ ⁄ ⁄

⁄Move the cursor to select a detection mode

using the arrow buttons and rotate the jog dial

to check the radio button next to the selected

detection mode. Press the SET button to deter-

mine the selection.

Notes:

• Up to 200 results will be displayed. (When 200 results

are listed, searching will stop.)

• It may take some time until the search results are dis-

played.

VMD SEARCH

ANY AREA

• It is possible to stop searching by pressing the STOP

button.

MASKING DURATION

24h

VECTOR

20s

DURATION

20s

⁄Rotate the jog dial to select a result to be dis-

played.

SET : [SETUP/ESC] SEARCH : [PLAY]

VMD SEARCH

Refer to page 40 for further information about each of the

detection modes.

TIME&DATE

CAM

AUG.20.04 3:07:28 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:27 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:26 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:22 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:21 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:20 PM

AUG.20.04 3:07:19 PM

01ch

Move the cursor to the parameter box using the arrows but-

ton (C) to select a masking duration from the following.

1 s/1 min/1 h/24 h

AUG.20.04 3:07:28 AM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 AM

TOTAL

200

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

It is possible to turn the page by rotating the shuttle ring.

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR

using the arrows button (C) and rotate the jog dial to select

an area. Move the cursor to the parameter box of the

selected area using the arrows button (B) to select an

interval time for an object moving between each area from

the following.

⁄Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start play-

back.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording will

start.

–/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

Note: It is possible to skip from the playback point to the

listed time (motion detected time) by rotating the jog

dial when the LISTED indicator is lit.

Move the cursor to the parameter box of each area using

the arrows button (B) and rotate the jog dial to select a

moving duration for an object in each area from the follow-

ing.

To return to normal playback, press the LISTED button.

0 s/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

⁄Press the STOP button to stop playback.

⁄After setting the detection mode, press the

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

SETUP/ESC button.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D

areas.

ꢀ To delete the motion detection area

Note: In the ANY AREA mode, it is possible to set the

masking duration. When the masking duration is set,

motion will be ignored for a certain period (set duration

as the masking duration) in the same area. It is conve-

nient to set the masking duration to make the subject

period shorter in case it is necessary to search an

extended time range or when searching through many

results.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

It will be subject to listing if an object moves within the set

time to the other detection areas in the set order.

The following is an example.

zRotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA"

on the status bar.

10 s

Note: To delete all the motion detection areas, select

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after being

detected in area A.

"DELETE ALL AREA" and press the SET button.

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after being

detected in area B.

xMove the cursor to the motion detection area

to be deleted using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after being

detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action will

be performed.

The selected area will be deleted.

It will be subject to listing if an object keeps moving for the

set period in the detection area. For example, in case of the

following settings; 10 sec. for areas A and B, 20 sec. for

area C and 30 sec. for area D:

ꢀ Detection Mode

Set how to detect motion in the set motion detection area.

There are 3 detection modes as follows.

An event action will be performed when an object keeps

moving longer than the set period in the specified detection

area.

Note: It is impossible to set two or more detection modes

simultaneously.

10 s

It will be subject to listing if "motion" is detected in any of

the set motion detection areas.

20 s

30 s

Important:

• When images to be searched are recorded with a low

recording rate, the DURATION mode may not work cor-

rectly.

• It may take some time to search according to the con-

tents of the recorded images.

I Search for a marked point and

play from that point (Marking

search)

Display the recording time of the recorded images with a

marked point in a list or a thumbnail and select the desired

recording time to play. Refer to page 24 for further informa-

tion about marking.

To delete all displayed marking lists, press the camera

selection buttons [1] and [2] simultaneously for 2 seconds

or more when displaying the marking list window.

Note: Marking search is available only when "HDD normal

area" or "event recording area" is selected as the

recording area with the DISK SELECT window.

vcz

xRotate the jog dial or the shuttle ring to select

the desired marked time.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

TIME&DATE

CAM

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

AUG.20.04 4:39:38 PM

AUG.20.04 4:31:01 PM

AUG.20.04 4:17:35 PM

AUG.20.04 3:30:01 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:05 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:18 PM

AUG.20.04 2:40:31 PM

AUG.20.04 2:35:31 PM

01ch

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

x x

AUG.20.04 4:39:38 PM

AUG.20.04 2:31:22 PM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

zPress the SEARCH button repeatedly until the

cPress the PLAY/PAUSE button.

marking list window is displayed.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light, and playback of a recorded image from the

selected marked time will start.

TIME&DATE

CAM

AUG.20.04 4:39:38 PM

AUG.20.04 4:31:01 PM

AUG.20.04 4:17:35 PM

AUG.20.04 3:30:01 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:05 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:18 PM

AUG.20.04 2:40:31 PM

AUG.20.04 2:35:31 PM

01ch

Notes:

• It is possible to skip from the playback point to the list-

ed time (marked time) by rotating the jog dial when the

LISTED indicator is lit.

AUG.20.04 4:39:38 PM

AUG.20.04 2:31:22 PM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

To return to normal playback, press the LISTED button.

• It is possible that some recorded images with marked

points may have been deleted by overwrite recording

or the delete function.

The result list of the marking search will be displayed on

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (C D) to switch between displaying

the list window and the thumbnail window alternately.

vPress the STOP button.

TIME&DATE

CAM

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

AUG.20.04 4:39:38 PM

AUG.20.04 4:31:01 PM

AUG.20.04 4:17:35 PM

AUG.20.04 3:30:01 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:05 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:18 PM

AUG.20.04 2:40:31 PM

AUG.20.04 2:35:31 PM

01ch

AUG.20.04 4:39:38 PM

AUG.20.04 2:31:22 PM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES

It is possible to display live images on a single screen or a

multi-screen, or on a single sequential display (Displayed

images from cameras on a single screen will be automati-

cally switched.).

Notes:

• When live images from the audio assigned camera

channel (audio is assigned on the SETUP MENU:

"Recording" - "REC Setup" - "Audio Allocation") are dis-

played on a single screen, audio from the respective

camera channel will be heard.

• When the GO TO LAST button is pressed for 2 seconds

or more while displaying live images, playback of the

latest recorded images will start. (At the default setting,

playback will start from 30 seconds before the start time

of the latest recorded images.)

I Displaying Live Images on a

Single Screen

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ꢀ Electronic Zoom

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

When displaying a single screen, zooming in on the dis-

played image is possible.

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Electronic zoom is available only on the selected monitor.

When the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 indicator is lit (the moni-

tor 1 is selected), electronic zoom works only on monitor 1.

[WJ-HD309A]

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REPEAT

–

REV

FWD

MARK

LOGOUT

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

IRIS

LISTED

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

PRESET

/AUTO

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

SET

BUSY

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

z x

zPress the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to

[WJ-HD309A]

select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected, the indica-

tor will not light.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

xPress a camera selection button

(1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309A) to select a camera.

z x

Live images from the selected camera will be displayed

and the respective camera selection button will light green

or blue.

When monitor 2 is selected, live images will be displayed

on the VGA monitor.

zPress the SHIFT button when monitoring live

images on a single screen.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

xPress the EL-ZOOM button to enlarge the dis-

zPress the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to

played image.

select the monitor.

The displayed image will be displayed with x2 zoomed

size.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

Zooming level will change each time the EL-ZOOM button

is pressed.

x2 → x4 → OFF

xPress the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

Notes:

• When an image is zoomed in on (x2 or x4), it is possible

to move the zoomed image using the arrows button.

• When any indicator of PAN/TILT, ZOOM/FOCUS, IRIS,

PRESET/AUTO is lit, it is impossible to use the EL-

ZOOM function.

cPress a camera selection button 1 - 6 (1 - 3 for

the WJ-HD309A) to select a desired multi-

screen.

Camera selection button 1: 4-split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7-split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9-split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 5: 10-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

Camera selection button 6: 13-split screen (Only for the WJ-

HD316A)

I Displaying on a Multi-screen

It is possible to display images on a multi-screen (4, 7, 9,

10, 13, 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 4, 7, 9 for the WJ-HD309A).

Notes:

• Audio will not be heard when displaying images on a

multiscreen.

• When the GO TO LAST button is pressed for 2 seconds

or more while displaying live images, playback of the

latest recorded images will start. (At the default setting,

playback will start from 30 seconds before the start time

of the latest recorded images.)

[WJ-HD316A]

The camera selection buttons respective to the live images

displayed on a multi-screen will light green or blue.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

When monitor 2 is selected in step 1, live images will also

be displayed on the selected multi-screen on the VGA mon-

itor.

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

To display on a single screen

Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will go off.

Press any of the camera selection buttons.

Live images will be displayed on a single screen.

[WJ-HD309A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

When displaying on a 4-split screen

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

Each time the camera selection button 1 is pressed, the

displayed camera channels will be changed as follows:

WJ-HD316A: 1-4 CH → 5-8 CH → 9-12 CH → 13-16 CH

WJ-HD309A: 1-4 CH → 5-8 CH → 9 CH

COPY

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

When displaying on a 9-split screen

Each time the camera selection button 3 is pressed, the

displayed camera channels will be changed as follows:

Only for the WJ-HD316A: 1-9 CH → 10-16 CH

• When the GO TO LAST button is pressed for 2 seconds

or more while displaying live images, playback of the

latest recorded images will start. (At the default setting,

playback will start from 5 seconds before the start time

of the latest recorded images.)

I Sequential Display

Displayed images from cameras will be switched automati-

cally.

Camera images will be displayed sequentially according to

the settings performed in advance.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309A]

z c

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

zPress the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 button to

select the monitor.

When monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

xPress the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

cPress the SEQ button.

The camera selection button respective to the displayed

image will light green or blue.

To stop sequential display, press the SEQ button.

When trying to display on a single screen or multi-screen

during the sequential display, the sequential display will be

stopped.

When monitor 2 is selected in step 1, the sequential display

will also start on the VGA monitor.

Notes:

• It is possible to skip a sequential step (camera channel)

if no video input is supplied (Auto skip function). Refer

to a system administrator for further information.

• Cameras that are out of the controllable range set by

the camera partitioning function will be skipped. Refer

to the Network Setup Instructions (PDF) for further infor-

mation about the camera partitioning.

CONTROL CAMERAS

When displaying live images, the following camera controls

are possible.

• Panning/Tilting: Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

I Zooming

Zooms in/out on images. Depending on models of the con-

nected cameras, the image size for the respective zooming

level may be different. For further information, refer to the

operating instruction for the camera.

• Zooming:

• Focus:

• Iris:

Zooms in/out on images.

Adjusts the focus.

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

• Preset Action: Moves a camera to the preset position

registered in advance.

• Auto Function: Moves a camera with an auto function

set in advance.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

Notes:

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

• Controlling cameras is possible only when displaying

images on a single screen.

• Depending on models of the connected cameras, it

may be impossible to control the camera or some func-

tions may not be available.

z x

• When a user with higher priority is controlling the select-

ed camera, it may be impossible to control the camera.

Refer to page 66 for further information about priority.

• Refer to page 139 for descriptions of how to display

and perform the settings with the settings menu of the

camera from this unit.

zPress the ZOOM/FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

xUse the arrows button (CD) to zoom in on or

out of the displayed image.

Press the arrows button downward (C) to zoom out and

upward (D) to zoom in.

I Panning/Tilting

Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

cPress the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for

the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A)

respective to the controlled camera channel to

quit the zooming operation.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

I Focus

Adjusts the focus. The auto focus function is available.

zx x

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

zPress the PAN/TILT button.

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

The PAN/TILT indicator will light.

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

xUse the arrows button to adjust the vertical or

horizontal position.

z x x

Camera will move slowly by pressing the arrows button

while holding the PAN/TILT SLOW button down.

zPress the FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

cPress the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for

the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A)

respective to the controlled camera channel to

quit the panning/tilting operation.

xUse the arrows button (A B) to adjust the

I Preset Action

Moves a camera to the preset position registered in

focus.

Press the arrows button (A) to shift the focus nearer.

Press the arrows button (B) to shift the focus farther.

Auto focus is available by pressing the SET button.

advance.

Important:

• When using a camera of the WV-CS650 (WV-CSR650)

series or the WV-CS600 (WV-CSR600) series, register

preset positions using the settings menu of the camera.

• When the monitor 1 is selected, it is impossible to regis-

ter preset positions and move a camera to a preset

position by performing the following steps.

In this case, perform the settings using the setup menu

of camera.

cPress the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for

the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A)

respective to the controlled camera channel to

quit the focusing operation.

I Iris

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

ꢀ Register Preset Positions of Cameras

Up to 256 preset positions can be registered.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

[WJ-HD316A]

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

REV

FWD

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

PRESET

/AUTO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

LOGOUT

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

SET

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

BUSY

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

z x x

z x

zPress the IRIS button.

The IRIS indicator will light.

[WJ-HD309A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

xUse the arrows button (A B) to adjust the iris.

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

Press the arrows button (A) to close the iris.

Press the arrows button (B) to open the iris.

To reset the set iris, press the SET button.

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

z x

cPress the camera selection button ([1] - [16] for

the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9] for the WJ-HD309A)

respective to the controlled camera channel to

quit the iris operation.

zPress the PAN/TILT button and move the cam-

era to a desired position to be registered as a

preset position.

xPress the SET button. The REGISTRATION

PRESET POSITION window will be displayed.

REGISTRATION PRESET POSITION

PRESET NUMBER

CANCEL

ꢀ Move a camera to the preset position

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

[WJ-HD316A]

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

REV

FWD

PRESET

/AUTO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SET

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

BUSY

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

v v c

SET

BUSY

[WJ-HD309A]

z c c x

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

[WJ-HD309A]

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

IRIS

LISTED

REV

FWD

PRESET

/AUTO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SET

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

BUSY

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

v v c

SET

BUSY

z c c x

cPress a camera selection button

([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for

the WJ-HD309A) to register a preset position

number.

zPress the PRESET/AUTO button.

The pressed button number will be registered as a preset

position number.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

The jog dial also can be used to select a preset position

number by rotating it.

Up to 256 can be registered as preset position numbers.

xPress a camera selection button

([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for

the WJ-HD309A) to select a desired preset

position.

vSelect "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

Pressing the camera selection button [10/0] ([0] for the WJ-

HD309A) moves a camera to the home position.

The jog dial can also be used to select a preset position

number by rotating it.

The adjusted camera position (currently displayed on the

monitor) will be registered as a preset position with the

selected preset position number.

To cancel the selected preset position, select "CANCEL"

using the arrows button and press the SET button. The set-

ting will be canceled and the REGISTRATION PRESET

POSITION window will be closed.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

PRESET NUMBER

AUTO PAN

CANCEL

cSelect "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and the

camera will move to the selected preset position.

(It is also possible to close the PRESET/AUTO PAN window

and move the camera to the selected preset position by

pressing the SET button when the cursor is on "PRESET

NUMBER".)

When selecting "CANCEL" using the arrows button and

press the SET button, the PRESET/AUTO PAN window will

be closed.

Note: Refer to the operating instructions of the camera for

further information about the auto function of the cam-

era in use.

I Auto Function (Auto Pan, etc)

Moves a camera with an auto function set in advance.

Important:

When monitor 1 is selected, it is impossible to move a

camera with an auto function by performing the follow-

ing steps.

In this case, perform the settings using the setup menu

of camera.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

c x

z xc

zPress the PRESET/AUTO button.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

xMove the cursor to "AUTO PAN" using the

arrows button and check the radio button next

to "AUTO PAN" using the jog dial.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

PRESET NUMBER

AUTO PAN

CANCEL

cSelect "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and auto

function will start.

During auto function, it is impossible to register a preset

position. To close the PRESET/AUTO PAN window, select

"CANCEL" using the arrows button and press the SET but-

ton. The setting will be canceled and the PRESET/AUTO

PAN window will be closed.

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION

The event action will be performed when the following

events occur.

• Motion detection: When motion is detected by the

motion detection function (see below), this is stated as

an event of motion detection.

ꢀ Activity Detection Mode (ACT DET)

This mode records images in the place where an event

occurred without announcing it.

• Video Loss: When a video signal supply is stopped

because of a cable disconnection or malfunction of a

camera, this is stated as an event of video loss.

• Terminal alarm: When a signal is supplied from an

external device such as a door sensor to the ALARM

terminal, this is stated as an event of the terminal alarm.

• Command alarm: When a command alarm is supplied

from a PC connected to the SERIAL connector on the

rear panel of this unit, this is stated as an event of the

command alarm.

ꢀ OFF

Only recording the event log is applicable. Any other event

actions are not applicable.

Alarm

Mode

Activity

Detection Mode

Event Action

Start recording.

OFF

ꢁ

–

Displays event information

on the monitor.

–

About the Motion Detection Function (VMD)

ꢁ

Blinks the alarm indicator.

Sounds the buzzer.

–

An alarm signal will be supplied when motion (luminance

transition) is detected in a designated area. It is possible to

save images recorded in the place where motion is detect-

ed, or send e-mails when motion is detected.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about

the required settings for the motion detection function such

as the settings of the detection area.

* Switches from a dis-

played image to the

image from the location

of the alarm occurrence.

ꢁ

–

* Moves a camera to the

preset position.

ꢁ

–

* Announces an event

occurrence by sending

e-mails.

–

* Announces an event

occurrence by the

PS·Data/Serial (RS232C)

commands.

I Action at an event occurrence

The event action will be performed according to the set-

ꢁ

–

tings when an event occurs.

Supplies a signal from the

ALARM connector or the

ALARM/CONTROL con-

nector on the rear panel of

this unit (Alarm signal out-

put).

There are 2 event action modes, the alarm mode (ALARM)

and the activity detection mode (ACT DET), for each event

type. The event action will be different according to the

event action mode set.

When an event of the alarm mode (ALARM) occurs, this unit

activates the alarm action.

ꢁ

Records the event log.

* Transmits images to an

FTP server.

–

About the event action mode

ꢁ : Applicable

– : Not applicable

ꢀ Alarm Mode (ALARM)

This mode announces an event occurrence outside. Action

taken in the alarm mode is referred to as the alarm action.

* : Available only when using a PC via a network (Refer to

the Network Setup Instructions (PDF) for further informa-

tion.)

ꢀ Displays the event information in the alarm

display area on monitor 1 and the camera

title display area on monitor 2

Alarm Function

ꢀ Blinks the ALARM indicator on the front

panel

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

ALARM

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

OPERATE

ꢀ Switches from the images displayed on

monitor 1 and monitor 2 to the images from

the location of the alarm occurrence (on a

single screen)

ꢀ Sounds the buzzer

Contact a system administrator about sounding duration.

ꢀ Announces an event occurrence to the con-

nected system device (Alarm Output)

Sends

signal to the device connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector, and the connected device

such as a buzzer will be activated.

ꢀ Starts recording automatically

Starts recording the image from the location of the event

occurrence automatically.

ꢀ Moves a camera to the preset position

A camera will move to the preset position registered in

advance.

ꢀ Announces an event occurrence by sending

e-mails

E-mails will be sent to addresses registered in advance.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) on the

provided CD-ROM.

I Cancel the Alarm Action

I Suspend the Alarm Actions

It is possible to suspend (deactivate temporarily) the alarm

When an alarm has occurred, this unit will start the alarm

action according to the selected alarm action mode.

To cancel the alarm action, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

When "ON" is selected for "Alarm Auto Reset" (on the "Alarm

Setup" menu of "Event"), the following will be performed

automatically even if the alarm action is not canceled by

pressing the ALARM RESET button on the front panel.

actions even when an event has occurred.

This function will be useful when it is necessary not to acti-

vate the alarm actions for a certain period, such as when

configuring the system. However, images and event logs

will be recorded even when alarm actions are suspended.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

TIMER

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

• The ALARM indicator will stop blinking and light steadi-

ERROR

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

• The displayed alarm information will disappear

• The buzzer will stop beeping

LISTED

10/0

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

SEA

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

ꢀ To suspend (deactivate temporarily)

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

BUSY

the alarm actions

zPress both the ALARM RESET button and the

SET button at the same time.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will light.

zPress the ALARM RESET button to cancel the

alarm actions.

The ALARM indicator will go off.

ꢀ To stop suspending the alarm

actions

Note: When the alarm is canceled, the event action will

stop.

xPress both the ALARM RESET button and the

SET button at the same time again.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will go off.

Note: When an external switch is connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel, it is

possible to suspend the alarm actions using the exter-

nal switch.

In this case, the alarm actions will be suspended when

the external switch is on.

To stop suspending the alarm actions, set the external

switch to off.

COPYING (Duplicate)

It is possible to copy (duplicate) manually the images

recorded on the disk area selected with the DISK SELECT

window (page 25) to the HDD copy area or the external

recording device (DVD-RAM disk, DVD-R disk, CD-R disk)

connected to the unit.

It is recommended to make back-up copies on a regular

basis for unexpected situations such as malfunction of the

hard disk.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

Manual copy is available during the following.

• While displaying live images

z x

• While pausing playback of recorded images

• When displaying a search window (Recording event list

window, VMD search list window, Marking list window)

(Manual copy is not available when a thumbnail window

is displayed.)

[WJ-HD309A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

Notes:

SET

BUSY

• The auto copy function is available for copying record-

ed images to the DVD-RAM disk automatically. When

the auto copy function is enabled, manual copy is not

available. Refer to a system administrator for further

information about the auto copy function.

z x

• To copy during playback of recorded images, pause

the playback temporarily.

• To copy recorded images on the DVD-RAM disk, for-

matting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required in

advance. Refer to page 56 for the descriptions of how

to format DVD-RAM disks.

zPress the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

To copy recorded images during playback, pause the play-

back temporarily.

• Copy time may differ depending on the size of the

recorded image. It may take longer to copy images

recorded in higher quality and resolution even when

selecting the same number of cameras and designating

the same recording duration.

• When the clock of the unit has been changed by editing

the time and date settings or by the auto time adjust-

ment function, overlapping of the time ranges of the

images recorded before and after the time adjustment

could occur. In this case, copying may not function

properly.

xPress the COPY button.

DATA COPY

CAMERA

PERIOD

AUG

COPY DRIVE

HDD COPY AREA

Alter Detect

COPY1

COPY2

OFF

CANCEL

The DATA COPY window will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

The DATA COPY window will not be displayed when a

thumbnail window is displayed.

In this case, display a list window using the arrows button

(C D).

Notes:

• When the auto copy function is enabled, the DATA

COPY window will not be displayed.

• The copy cancel window will be displayed if the user

who started manual copy presses the COPY button dur-

ing the manual copy. (It is impossible to stop manual

copy performed by other users.)

Confirm the SHIFT indicator is lit. Then, press the COPY

button and [1] simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

Confirm the SHIFT indicator is lit. Then, press the COPY

button and [2] simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

• Copying will be performed in the following order:

Viewer Software → Images → Audio

cvcv v

Depending on the set time range for "PERIOD", some of

images and audio may not be copied.

cPerform the settings for data copy (camera

• Use the viewer software to play the copied images.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) for

descriptions of how to play the copied images.

channel, time range, the disk on which images

are to be copied). Move the cursor to each set-

ting item using the arrows button and select a

parameter by rotating the jog dial. (It is possi-

ble to change only the CAMERA parameter set-

tings by pressing the SET button.)

Notes:

• Time range to be set for "PERIOD" should be 99 min-

utes and 59 seconds or less to copy images for one

attempt. (Copying will stop automatically when the size

of the copied data reaches 4 GB even before the end

time of the set time range.)

• When "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is selected for "COPY

DRIVE", it is possible to detect alteration using the view-

er software by checking the "ALTER DETECT" check-

box.

vSelect the "OK" button using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

The DATA COPY window will be closed and data copy will

start.

The copy icon will be displayed on the task bar during

copying.

To close the DATA COPY window, select "CANCEL" using

the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will

be canceled and the DATA COPY window will be closed.

Copy icon

In the following cases, copying will not start even when you

move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button:

• When another user has selected the desired copy drive

• When copying is being performed manually

Important:

• To eject the disk, do the following operation (copy com-

pletion) while live images are displayed before pressing

the eject button of the external recording device.

DELETE DATA ON THE DISK

Perform the settings for the built-in hard disk of the unit, the

optional extension unit and the DVD-RAM disk. These are

the descriptions of how to delete recorded images on the

hard disk and how to format a DVD-RAM disk.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about

the other disks.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

I Deletion of recorded images

saved on the hard disk manually

Delete recorded images saved in the normal area or the

event area of the built-in hard disk or the optional extension

unit manually.

xMove the cursor to "Advanced Menu" using

the arrows button (C D) and press the SET

button.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

By setting a time and date, images in the normal record

area of the hard disk recorded before the set time and date

will be deleted.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

*****

Time

Date

PSD User

Manually delete unwanted images on the hard disk.

User Regist.

User Edit

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

OFF

Important:

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

• It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

• When "STOP" is selected for "Disk End Mode", the avail-

able disk space will not be increased even though dele-

tion is performed.

10s

OFF

cMove the cursor to "Maintenance" using the

arrows button (C D A B) and press the SET

button.

Note: It is possible to delete recorded images automatically

when the set days have passed from the day the image

was recorded (Auto Delete). Refer to a system adminis-

trator for further information.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Comm

Maintenance

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

Event Log

Error Log

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

Quick Menu

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

NORMAL

EXTENDED

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

vMove the cursor to "Data Delete" using the

arrows button (C D).

xcv

The "Data Delete" menu will be displayed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

zPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

more.

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" on the SETUP MENU (Quick) (page 97), the top

page of the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed. In

this case, go to step 3.

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

,Select "OK" using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

Normal recording area is going

to be erased.

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

Are you sure?

SET

BUSY

bm, n

nm,

CANCEL

To cancel delete, select "CANCEL".

bPress the SET button.

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

.Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

more.

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be closed and the live

images will be displayed.

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

nMove the cursor to "Manual Delete for Normal

Recording Area" or "Manual Delete for Event

Recording Area" using the arrows button, and

set time and date using the jog dial.

The images recorded until the day before the set time and

date will be subject to be deleted.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Disc Format of DVD

FORMAT

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

mMove the cursor to "DELETE" using the arrows

button and press the SET button.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Disc Format of DVD

FORMAT

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK

To copy (duplicate) recorded images onto the DVD-RAM

disk, formatting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required

in advance.

cSelect "Maintenance" using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

To delete images recorded on the DVD-RAM disk, format-

ting (initializing) of the DVD-RAM disk is also required.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Comm

Maintenance

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Important:

All data on the disk will be deleted if formatted (initial-

ized). It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

Quick Menu

NORMAL

EXTENDED

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

vSelect "Data Delete" using the arrows button

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

(C D).

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

xcvn xcb

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

zPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

Access Log

Quick Menu

more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" on the SETUP MENU (Quick) (page 97), the top

page of the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed. In

this case, go to step 3.

bPress the SET button.

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

SETUP MENU

Quick

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

LIVE

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Delete before JAN

Network

DELETE

JAN

10 00 00 PM

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

FORMAT

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

nSelect either "COPY1" or "COPY2" (port to

which the DVD-RAM is connected) for "Disc

Format of DVD" using the arrows button.

xMove the cursor to "Advanced Menu" using

the arrows button (C D) and press the SET

button.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Delete before JAN

Basic Setup

DELETE

ADMIN Password

*****

PSD User

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

Disc Format of DVD

Time

Date

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

User Regist.

User Edit

Event Log

Error Log

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Access Log

Quick Menu

OFF

Follow the priority.

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

ENGLISH

10s

OFF

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

mPress the SET button to select "FORMAT".

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

All of data in the COPY1 is going

to be erased.

Starting format?

CANCEL

,Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows but-

ton and press the SET button to start format-

ting.

To stop formatting, select "CANCEL" and press the SET but-

ton.

During formatting, the status window will be displayed.

The status window will be closed automatically after com-

pleting formatting.

.Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more to close the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Live images will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION

It is possible to attach text information to images when

recording.

Entering 20 characters for a line (up to 10 lines, with a total

of 200 characters) is possible.

xPress the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

These are the descriptions of how to display/edit the

attached text information for images.

cPress the TEXT button to display the TEXT

INFORMATION window.

Note: Displaying/editing text information is possible during

the following.

TEXT INFORMATION

• While pausing playback on a single screen

• While displaying the recording event list window

[WJ-HD316A]

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

Text information attached to the paused playback image or

text information attached to the selected recording event

will be displayed.

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

To close the TEXT INFORMATION window, press the

SETUP/ESC button or the SET button.

BUSY

[WJ-HD309A]

vPress the TEXT button again to edit text infor-

mation.

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

TEXT INFORMATION

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

EXT : [TEXT]

z<While playing on a single screen> Press the

PLAY/PAUSE button to stop playback.

<While displaying the recording event list win-

dow>

Select a desired recording event by rotating

the jog dial.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

AUG.20.04 3:04:23 PM

AUG.20.04 3:01:24 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:40 PM

AUG.20.04 3:00:00 PM

AUG.20.04 2:59:11 PM

AUG.20.04 2:45:45 PM

AUG.20.04 2:44:09 PM

AUG.20.04 2:33:16 PM

01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJ

AUG.20.04 3:22:10 AM

AUG.20.04 2:31:18 AM

TOTAL

100

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Important:

It is impossible to edit text information using the system

controller.

[WJ-HD316A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

n b

[WJ-HD309A]

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

PRESET

/AUTO

SET

BUSY

n b

bEdit text information using the arrows button

and the jog dial.

• To insert a character

Move the cursor to a desired point where a character is

to be inserted using the arrows button, and select a

character using the jog dial.

• To delete a character

Move the cursor to a character to be deleted using the

arrows button, and press the STOP button.

• To delete all characters

Press the STOP button for 2 seconds or more.

• Available characters

The following characters can be entered:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a

b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | }

~ SP

Press the TEXT button after editing text.

nPress the SET button to apply the edited char-

acters.

TEXT INFORMATION

Digital Disc Recorder WJ-HD316

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

To cancel the edit, press the SETUP/ESC button. The edit-

ed characters will not be applied.

ERROR/WARNINGS

• The "error" status

When a fatal error (one that might cause the system to go down) has occurred, the ERROR indicator will blink red and the

error indication will be displayed on the monitor 2.

• The "warning" status

When an error (even though it has not caused the system trouble yet, but which may become a fatal error) has occurred,

the ERROR indicator will blink orange.

• When the buzzer sounding duration has passed from the error occurrence or the ALARM RESET button is pressed, the

error indication will disappear and the blinking ERROR indicator will light steadily. (Error half-reset)

If the error is eliminated, the ERROR indicator will go off when the ALARM RESET button is pressed while the ERROR indi-

cator is lit. (Error reset)

At an error occurrence

In the error half-reset

condition

In the error reset condition

Off

ERROR indicator on the

front panel

Blinks

Lights steadily

Sounds (when it has been

set)

Stops

Buzzer

Error display area on the

main bar

Displays

Does not display

Does not output

The error output (pin no.18)

of the ALARM/CONTROL

connector

Outputs

Does not output

Problem mail

Transmitted (When it has

been set)

–

Error log

Filed

Indication

ALT-*

Status

Description

Solution

Error

Recorded image has been altered.

Playback will be paused.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to resume

playback.

W-ERROR

Failed to write data on the HDD.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset/error reset condition.

When the "W-ERROR" indication is dis-

played frequently, contact the dealer to

replace the hard disk drive.

SMART

Warning

The hard disk may be malfunctioning

and may not work correctly.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Contact the dealer to replace the hard

disk.

H-METER

The set time for the HOUR METER has

passed. (Refer to page 135.)

It may be reaching the end of the hard

disk’s lifetime.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Contact the dealer to replace the hard

disk.

Indication

THERMAL

Status

Warning

Description

Solution

Thermal error of the unit or the optional

extension unit has been detected.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset/error reset condition.

If thermal errors occur frequently, the

unit may be malfunctioning. Contact the

dealer.

POWER

Warning

The power outage alert signal is sup-

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

plied from the uninterruptible power sup- cel the warning status. The unit will be in

ply system (UPS). Internal processing the error half-reset/error reset condition.

will start when the set time for "Shutdown The unit will start operation automatically

Time" on the "Basic Setup" menu of

"System" has passed after having

received the power outage alert signal.

(Refer to page 106.) When the internal

processing starts, recording will stop

and all operations will be invalid.

after the UPS starts power supply.

#-nn% (available

disk space is run-

ning out)

#-FULL (no avail-

able disk space)

Error

The hard disk is almost full or completely Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

full.

cel the error/warning status. The unit will

be in the error half-reset/error reset con-

dition. Initialize or replace the hard disk.

(Refer to pages 145, 140.) When initial-

ized, all recorded data will be deleted. It

is recommended to copy the data using

an external recording device.

Warning

The DVD-RAM disk is almost full or com- Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

pletely full.

cel the error/warning status. The unit will

be in the error half-reset/error reset con-

dition. Initialize the DVD-RAM disk.

(Refer to page 56.) When initialized, all

recorded data will be deleted.

The CD-R or DVD-R disk is almost full or Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

completely full.

cel the error/warning status. The unit will

be in the error half-reset/error reset con-

dition. Replace the disk with a new one.

MEDIUM-n

Warning

The external recording device is not

operable because no disk or different

format disk has been inserted, etc.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset/error reset condition.

Confirm that a disk has been inserted, or

check the inserted disk format.

REMOVE

FAN

Error

An error has occurred on the hard disk

and the hard disk has been unmounted hard disk, the "REMOVE" error status will

from the system automatically. be canceled.

Consult the dealer. After replacing the

Warning

The fan of this unit or the optional exten- Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

sion unit is malfunctioning. It may pro-

duce an increase in temperature in the

cel the warning status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset condition. Consult the

unit and cause malfunction of the HDDs. dealer.

HDD-ERROR

Error

The designated hard disk drive was not Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

found because of a hard disk drive

error, etc.

cel the error status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset condition. Contact

the dealer.

Indication

M-FAIL

Status

Description

Solution

Error

Failed to recover mirroring.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset condition. Contact

the dealer.

R-FAIL

Failed to recover RAID.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. The unit will be in

the error half-reset condition. Contact

the dealer.

* : Camera number

# : Partition number (Refer to page 15.)

nn : Available disk space (percentage)

n : COPY port number to which an external recording device is connected

Note: The available disk space warning will be given only once when the available disk space has reached the set value. Mail

notification of an available disk space warning will be sent each time 1 % of the available disk space is reduced after the

available disk space has reached the set value. Refer to page 136 for descriptions of how to set the available disk space

(Disk Capacity) warning. For further information about mail notification of available disk space warning, refer to the Network

Setup Instructions (PDF).

OPERATION USING A PC

It is possible to perform the settings or operate the unit

using a web browser installed on a PC when this unit is

connected to a network.

The available features and the system requirements of a

PC are as follows.

I System Requirements of a PC

It is recommended to operate this unit using a PC that

meets the following system requirements. If using a PC that

does not meet the following system requirements, it may

cause problems such as slow imaging or the browser

becomes unable to operate.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (PDF) on the

provided CD-ROM.

OS:

One of the following operating systems:

Microsoft^®Windows^®2000 Professional SP4

Microsoft^®Windows^®XP Professional or Home Edition

SP1

I Features

It is possible to operate this unit using a web browser in

much the same way as using the buttons on the front panel

of this unit.

PC:

The following functions are available when using a PC via a

network as well as the functions operable using the buttons

on the front panel of the unit.

IBM PC/AT Compatible

CPU:

Intel^®Pentium^®4, 1.4 GHz or faster

ꢀ Downloading/transmitting images

Memory:

It is possible to download (save) the currently displayed

image in the web browser window onto the hard disk of a

PC. By establishing an FTP server, it is possible to transmit

images to a designated FTP server. When an event occurs,

it is possible to transmit images from the camera installed

in the place where the event occurred.

512 MB or more

Monitor:

1024 x 768 pixels or more, HIGH color 16 bit or more

Interface:

Built-in network interface card compatible 10/100 Mbps

Recommended web browser:

ꢀ Event notification function

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, 6.0 SP1

Other web browsers are not compatible with this unit.

When an event occurs, it is possible to send e-mails to

designated addresses to notify of the event occurrence. It

is also possible to send an e-mail with a recorded image of

the place where the event occurred.

Important:

The plug-in software must be installed. The plug-in soft-

ware will be downloaded and installed automatically

when accessing the unit using a browser. If the plug-in

software has not been downloaded/installed correctly,

install it from the provided CD-ROM.

ꢀ Host authentication

It is possible to restrict devices from operating this unit if

their IP addresses are not registered.

Refer to "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM for the

descriptions of how to install it.

OPERATION OF THE UNIT IN THE CASCADE CONNECTION

Important:

This example works only when all the system controllers

When connecting multiple units (up to 4 units) in the cas-

cade connection, it is possible to monitor images from all

of the WJ-HD316A/309A in the cascade connection using

a monitor. It is necessary in advance to perform the set-

tings to operate the unit in the cascade connection. Refer

to a system administrator for further information.

of the unit address 002 - 004 are the WV-CU650.

If any of the system controller of the unit address 002 -

004 is the WV-CU360C, the camera channel playing on

monitor 2 using the system controller of the unit

address 001 will be changed when playback operation

is performed by the WV-CU360C.

Important:

To allow the system controllers of the unit address 002 -

004 to operate only monitor 1 connected to each of the

unit, use the WV-CU650 for the unit address 002 - 004.

• Video output signal will not be supplied from the MONI-

TOR (VGA) connector when connecting the units in the

cascade connection.

• When audio input signals are supplied to the AUDIO IN

connectors, audio will be heard from the respective

unit to the AUDIO IN connector.

PS·Data compatible

system controller

Monitor 2

(Unit Address: 001)

System Controller

I Setup

For the unit

• Select "ON" for "Cascade" of "PS.Data Setup" on the

SETUP MENU (Advanced) ("Comm" - PS.data Setup" -

"Cascade").

First unit

(Unit Address

(System): 001)

Monitor 1

STOP

PLA

AUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

AN/

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

TIL

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

AN/TILT

A-B SLOW

REPEA

ZOOM/

FOCUS

ALARM

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD

SET

BUSY

WJ-HD

System Controller

(Unit Address: 002)

System Controller

Second unit

(Unit Address

(System): 002)

• Set the unit address as follows.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

PAN/

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

AN/TILT

A-B SLOW

REPEA

ZOOM/

FOCUS

ALARM

SUSPEND

–

ALARM

RESET

WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A

Unit Address

(System)

Unit Address

(Controller)

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD

SET

BUSY

WJ-HD

System Controller

(Unit Address: 003)

First unit

001

002

003

004

System Controller

Third unit

(Unit Address

(System): 003)

Number except

001 - 004

(Do not allocate a

number already in

use.)

Second unit

Third unit

Monitor 1

STOP

PLA

AUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

AN/

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

TIL

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

AN/TILT

A-B SLOW

REPEA

ZOOM/

FOCUS

ALARM

SUSPEND

–

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD

SET

BUSY

Fourth unit

WJ-HD

System Controller

(Unit Address: 004)

System Controller

Fourth unit

(Unit Address

(System): 004)

For the system controller

• Set the unit address as follows.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

AN/

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

TIL

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

AN/TILT

A-B SLOW

REPEA

ZOOM/

FOCUS

ALARM

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD

SET

BUSY

WJ-HD

System controller

Unit Address

Note

It is possible to

operate all of four

units.

Controller used to oper-

ate the first unit

001

I Operation using the buttons on

It is possible to

Controller used to oper-

ate the second unit

operate only moni-

tor 1 connected to

the second unit.

the front panel

002

003

004

It is possible to operate the unit using the buttons on the

front panel as described on pages 18 - 53. When monitor 2

is selected, images will be displayed on monitor 2 connect-

ed to the first unit. When monitor 1 is selected, images will

be displayed on monitor 1 connected to the unit currently in

use.

When operating the buttons on the front panel, only

live/recorded images from the cameras connected to the

unit currently in use are available. It is impossible to oper-

ate live/recorded images from the cameras connected to

the other units.

It is possible to

operate only moni-

tor 1 connected to

the third unit.

Controller used to oper-

ate the third unit

It is possible to

Controller used to oper-

ate the fourth unit

operate only moni-

tor 1 connected to

the fourth unit.

I Operation using the system con-

trollers

When using the system controller to which the unit

number "001" is allocated

It is possible to operate all of the WJ-HD316A/309A in the

cascade connection using an optional PS·Data compatible

controller by designating a unit number. When monitor 2 is

selected, it is possible to display images from any unit

which will be displayed on monitor 2 connected to the first

unit. ^(*1)

When monitor 1 is selected, images will be displayed on

monitor 1 connected to the unit currently in use. Refer to the

operating instructions of the system controller for further

information about the PS·Data mode operation.

*1: When the WV-CU360C is used for the unit address 001,

images from the desired camera channel sometimes

may not be displayed on monitor 2 connected to the

first unit. In this case, select the desired camera chan-

nel first using the WV-CU360C.

When using the system controller to which the unit

number "002", "003" or "004" is allocated

It is possible to operate only monitor 1 connected to any

unit by designating a unit number using an optional PS-

Data compatible controller.

MANAGEMENT OF USERS/HOSTS

It is necessary in advance to register users and PCs (hosts) who access this unit via a network such as a LAN.

Up to 32 users and 8 hosts can be registered.

The following information can be registered as user information and host information.

Item

Description

Note

User name

Name of user who logs into this unit. Enter this Item to be set only for user registration

in the login window.

Host IP address

IP address of a PC that accesses this unit.

Only PCs with registered IP addresses can

access this unit if ON is selected for "Host

Authentication".

Item to be set only for host registration

Item to be set only for user registration

Password

Level

Password of user who logs into this unit. Enter

this in the login window.

Level of users or hosts for operable functions.

Refer to page 109 for further information.

Priority

Priority of controllable functions. When two or

more users/hosts performed the same opera-

tion, only a user/host with the highest priority

can perform the operation.

Determine the priority in the following cases:

• A user tries to log in after another user has

already logged in.

• A user tries to control a camera that is being

controlled by another user.

Default screen

Startup display to be displayed on monitor 1,

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor after login.

Camera partitioning

Controllable range for each camera channel.

For the set items above, the unit will work differently depending on whether the unit is operated directly or operated via a net-

work as follows.

ꢀ When the unit is operated directly

Operate using the monitor connected with this unit. There are 3 ways to operate this unit as follows:

• Operate using the buttons on the front panel of the unit

• Operate using a PS·Data compatible controller

Note: The priority setting of this unit will not be applied when controlling the cameras connected to the coaxial communica-

tion using a PS·Data compatible controller. (Post-priority will be applied.)

• Operate using a PC connected to the SERIAL connector (RS232C) on the rear panel of the unit

It is impossible to log into the unit simultaneously by the above methods (except when using the same user name to log in).

When a user tries to log in after another user has already logged into the unit, the unit will work as follows according to the set-

ting for "Priority" of "System".

Setting for "Priority"

Description

Follow the priority

When a user’s priority is higher than the one of the other user

who has already logged in, this user can log in and the other

user who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

When a user’s priority is lower than the one of the other user

who has already logged in, this user cannot log in.

Pre-priority

Post-priority

When another user has already logged in, any user except

administrators cannot log in regardless of priority.

When an administrator has logged in, the other user who has

already logged in will be forced to log out.

Any user can log in regardless of priority.

Notes:

• When a user is operating this unit using a PS·Data compatible controller, this user can log in automatically as a PSD user

set for "PSD User" of "System" on the SETUP MENU.

• When a user logged into this unit using a PS·Data compatible controller and didn’t operate the unit for around 2 minutes,

this PSD user will be forced to log out.

• It is possible to log in as the user who has already logged in regardless of priority.

ꢀ When the unit is operated using a PC via a network

Operate using a PC via a network. Up to 8 hosts (PCs) can access the unit.

When a host tries to log in after 8 hosts have already logged in the unit, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for

"Priority" of "System".

Setting for "Priority"

Description

Follow the priority

When a host’s priority is higher than the one of the other host

who has already logged in, this host can log in and the other

host who has already logged in will be forced to log out.

When a host’s priority is lower than the one of the other host

who has already logged in, this host cannot log in.

Pre-priority

Post-priority

Any host cannot log in regardless of priority. However, it is

possible to log in as an administrator by operating the but-

tons on the front panel of the unit. In this case, users who

have already logged in will be forced to log out.

Any host can log in regardless of priority.

When accessing the unit using a PC via a network, the unit will work as follows according to the setting for "User

Authentication" and "Host Authentication" of "NW Setup 1".

Setting for "User

Authentication"

Setting for "Host

Authentication"

User/Host to log in

Note

OFF

Log into the unit as an admin-

istrator.

Log into the unit as a regis-

tered user.

The login window will be dis-

played.

OFF

Log into the unit as a regis-

tered host.

The login window will not be

displayed.

Log into the unit as a regis-

tered user.

It is impossible to log in for

an unregistered host.

OPERATING THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST TIME

Important:

vPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

When connecting an optional extension unit (the WJ-

HDE300 series), turn on the power of the extension unit

before turning on the power of this unit.

more.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed.

Adjust the clock of the unit with this menu.

Refer to page 18 for further information about clock adjust-

ment.

zTurn on the POWER switch.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

xPress the SET button when the system check

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

complete window is displayed.

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

The HDD DISK MENU window will be displayed.

Perform the settings with this menu according to your

needs.

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

Refer to page 143 for further information.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

bWith the default setting, the unit is ready to

start manual recording. Perform the settings

for recordings or event actions according to

your needs.

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

nPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

more.

After completing the settings, press any button to close the

HDD DISK MENU.

The login window will be displayed.

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be closed and the live

images will be displayed.

When "ON" is selected for "Auto Login" of "Basic Setup" on

the "System" menu, the login window will not be displayed.

(The default setting is ON.)

cEnter a user name and password.

Live images will be displayed after logging in.

Refer to page 17 for further information about the user

name and password.

Notes:

• With the default setting, the disk space is set as the nor-

mal recording area. Perform the settings for each

recording area according to your needs.

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name: ADMIN

Password: 12345

• To enhance the security, change the password for an

administrator periodically.

cSelect "Maintenance" using the arrows button

Preparation for maintenance (HDD

replacement, installation, etc.)

(C D A B) and press the SET button.

When maintaining (HDD replacement, installation, etc.)

without turning the power of the unit off, carry out the follow-

ing operation after setting the HDD SAFETY MODE to ON.

(The default setting is OFF.)

This can be set on the "Disk Info" menu of "Maintenance".

Refer to page 135 for further information.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Comm

Maintenance

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

Quick Menu

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Important:

After completing the installation or the maintenance, set

the HDD SAFETY MODE to OFF.

vMove the cursor to "Disk Info" using the

arrows button (C D) and press the SET but-

ton.

Do the following before starting operation when maintaining

(HDD replacement, installation, etc.).

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

zPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Remaining

more.

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

Normal REC Area

Event REC Area

Copy Area

1800GB

Disk Info

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

1200GB

1000GB

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

The SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed on monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" (page 97), the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be dis-

played. In this case, go to step 3.

COPY 1 (Rear)

COPY 2 (Front)

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

3000h

OFF

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

bMove the cursor to "HDD Safety Mode" and

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

rotate the jog dial to select "ON".

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Remaining

Advanced Menu

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

Normal REC Area 1800GB

Disk Info

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

Event REC Area 1200GB

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Copy Area

Copy 1(Rear)

Copy 2(Front)

1000GB

Event Log

Error Log

xSelect "Advanced Menu" using the arrows but-

Access Log

Quick Menu

30000h

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

ton (C D) and press the SET button.

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

nPress the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

more.

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

*****

Time

Date

PSD User

User Regist.

User Edit

ADMIN

The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be closed.

The unit will restart automatically and the HDD SAFETY

MODE window will be displayed.

Auto Login

Auto Login User

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

The HDD safety mode will begin.

10s

OFF

The camera selection buttons (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1

- 9, 0 for the WJ-HD309A) will light green and go off (for 2

seconds each) alternately.

The following window will be displayed after around 30 sec-

onds.

ꢀ When replacing the built-in hard disk of the

unit

Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will go off.

The power supply to the front panel will be cut and the unit

will be unable to operate with the front panel.

Start maintenance after this window is displayed.

The procedures are different between the replacement of

the hard disks and the installation of the unit (rack mount-

ing/unmounting).

Detach the cable from the front panel and start replacing

the built-in hard disk.

Start from step 2 on page 140 to replace the built-in hard

disk.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will light by

attaching the cable to the front panel. The power will be

supplied to the front panel and the unit will be enabled to

operate with the front panel.

Refer to the following descriptions.

When the system check has been completed, the HDD

SAFETY MODE window (as shown below) will be displayed.

The camera selection buttons on the front panel (1 - 16 for

the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9, 0 for the WJ-HD309A) will light

green and orange (for 2 seconds each) alternately.

ꢀ When replacing the built-in hard disk of the

extension unit

Once displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window in step 5,

start replacing the built-in hard disk of the optional exten-

sion unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the extension unit for

the descriptions of how to replace the hard disk.

Move the cursor to OFF using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

ꢀ When installing/uninstalling the unit

into/from the rack (rack mounting/unmount-

ing)

Once displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window in step 5,

start installing/uninstalling the unit.

The unit will restart automatically and the system check

complete window will be displayed.

When the system check complete window is displayed,

carry out the procedures described on page 68 (start from

x).

Important:

Detach the cable from the front panel after confirming

that the OPERATE indicator on the front panel is not lit.

Otherwise, it may cause malfunction.

INSTALLATIONS

Places to avoid

• Places exposed to direct sunlight or near a source of heat such as a radiator

• Very dirty and dusty places

• Places subject to strong vibrations

• Near magnetic field sources such as a television or speakers

• Near high-voltage cables such as a power cable

• Near noise sources such as fluorescent lamps

• Places where condensation forms easily

• Humid places

• Places where drastic temperature changes occur

• Places which are not level

• Steamy and oily places such as kitchens

Rack mounting

1. Remove the rubber legs (6 pcs.) on the bottom of the

unit.

• Use a flat-blade screwdriver and remove the screws.

2. Install the rack mounting brackets on both sides of the

unit.

• Using the mounting screws (4 pcs.) for the rack mount-

ing brackets, fix them firmly.

Remove the rubber legs.

3. Install the unit in the rack.

• Fix the unit firmly with the rack mounting screws (4

pcs.).

Mounting screws for rack mounting brackets

(accessories)

Important:

• The cooling fan inside the unit is perishable and must

be replaced periodically.

• Do not block the ventilation openings or slots in the

cover to prevent the unit from overheating.

• If the rack is subject to vibration, secure the rear of the

unit to the rack using additional mounting brackets (not

Rack mounting brackets (accessories)

included).

• Be sure to keep the temperature inside the rack below

30 °C (86 °F) when operating the units. Installing venti-

lation fan(s) in the rack is recommended especially

when the rack is covered with front lids. Otherwise, it

can cause reductions in the lifespans of hard disk dri-

ves.

• When installing, install the unit lower in the rack with a

space equivalent to about 1 unit (44 mm) or more sepa-

rating it from the other appliances.

Rack mounting screws

For our rack: Nominal diameter 5 tapping (accessory)

CONNECTIONS

Important:

• Use only the recommended BNC connectors listed below.

RECOMMENDED

Tip dimensioins inside the BNC

BNC

Video (coaxial) Cable

Ø 1.32 mm – Ø 1.37 mm

Tip

(inside)

Ø 0.13 mm – Ø 0.69 mm

Standards

For U.S.A.

For Europe

For Japan

MIL-C39012C or MIL-C39012/16F

BS CECC 22120:1981

JIS C5412

Suffixes attached to the standards may be updated.

Other BNC connectors may cause video signal interruption, and damage the BNC receptacles on the rear panel of the

unit.

• When connecting the Panasonic matrix switcher or the data multiplex unit to this unit, the looped through output signal for

every video input signal from them must be supplied to the video input connectors of this unit directly.

Do not supply the monitor output signal or the spot output signal from the matrix switcher or the data multiplex unit to the

video input connectors of this unit.

Otherwise, the images may be disorderly displayed and recorded for a split second. (The images displayed before switch-

ing channel may be displayed and recorded.)

I Connections when the unit is used independently

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used independently.

Important:

• When connecting the Panasonic matrix switcher or the coaxial communication unit to this unit, the looped through output

signal for every video input signal from them must be supplied to the video input connectors of this unit directly.

Do not supply the monitor output signal or the spot output signal from the matrix switcher or the coaxial communication unit

to the video input connectors of this unit. Otherwise, the improper image switching may occur and the images displayed

before switching channels may be displayed and recorded.

• The power plug should be connected last.

• When connecting combination cameras, connect them to the video input connectors 1 - 8 when using the WJ-HD316A or

1 - 6 when using the WJ-HD309A (for coaxial communication).

ꢀ Examples of connections

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

Mode switch setting (Factory default)

Microphone

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Note: If the DATA and RS485 ports are not

used, the mode switches should be used as

illustrated.

Amplifier

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

120 V AC

60 Hz

For Audio Amplifier

•

System cameras

(VIDEO IN 9 - 16)

Combination cameras

(VIDEO IN 1 - 8)

Notes:

• The SETUP MENU will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. (It is impossible to display the SETUP MENU on

monitor 1.)

• The same images displayed on monitor 2 will be displayed on the VGA monitor.

I Connections with an extension unit

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used together with an optional extension unit.

This unit can be connected with up to seven extension units.

Connect the EXT IN port on the rear panel of the extension unit and the EXT STORAGE port on the rear panel of this unit using

the cable provided with the optional extension unit.

Important:

• Use the cable provided with the optional extension unit.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with each unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may

cause recording failures or an unstable system.

How to fix the cable clamp

Cable Clamp

COPY

Fixing screw

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Remove this screw from the

unit and fix the cables with the

cable clamp using the screw

removed from the unit.

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

Cable (attached to the extension unit)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

EXT

OUT

Extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series)

Cable Clamp

EXT

Fixing screw

OUT

Remove this screw from the

unit and fix the cables with the

cable clamp using the screw

removed from the unit.

How to fix the cable clamp

I Connections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and DVD-R drives

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive.

Connect the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive and the COPY1 port on the rear panel or the COPY2 port inside the

connectors cover on the front panel of this unit using an USB cable (not included).

Important:

• Use an appropriate USB cable compatible with the USB2.0 standard.

• When a DVD-RAM, DVD-R or CD-R drive is connected to one of the COPY1 or COPY2 port, do not connect another drive

to the other port.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with this unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connections that may

cause recording failures or an unstable system.

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

How to fix the cable clamp

Cable Clamp

USB cable (Locally procured)

Fixing screw

COPY

10/100BASE-T

Remove this screw from the

EXIT ST

ORA

unit and fix the cables with the

cable clamp using the screw

removed from the unit.

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

Rear

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

VIDEO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

SUSPEND

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Front

USB cable (Locally procured)

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

I Connections with the VCR

When it is necessary to copy the recorded images to a video tape using a VCR, connect the VCR to the S-VIDEO connector (or

the VIDEO OUT connector) and the AUDIO OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel of this unit as below.

Open the connectors cover.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

PAN/

TILT

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

VIDEO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

AUDIO

Audio cable with an RCA pin plug (Locally procured)

Video cable with an RCA pin plug (Locally procured)

VCR

VIDEO

S-VIDEO IN

connector

S-video cable (Locally procured)

Notes:

• The same video signal supplied to the MONITOR2 (VGA) connector will be supplied to the S-VIDEO connector and the

VIDEO OUT connector inside the connectors cover.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT connector on the rear panel of this unit will be supplied to the AUDIO

OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel.

• When connecting multiple units in the cascade connection, it is impossible to supply video output signals of an other unit

using the S-VIDEO connector or the MONITOR (VGA) connector. Connect VCRs individually to each WJ-HD316A/WJ-

HD309A unit.

I Connections with PS·Data systems

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the PS·Data devices.

If a connected system controller is PS·Data compatible, it is possible to operate this unit or connected devices using the sys-

tem controller.

Use the RS485 cable provided with the system controller.

Important:

• Terminate both devices on both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the descriptions

of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel. (See below.)

• When connecting a PS·Data compatible device, it is necessary to set each item of "PS·Data Setup" of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU according to the system configuration.

• The PS·Data is our exclusive protocol. Contact the dealer about devices that can be connected.

ꢀ When connecting this unit with a controller

System Controller

RS485 cable (provided with the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

(No. 8: OFF)

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

ꢀ When installing this unit between a controller and a system device

System Controller

RS485 cable

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 2

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Mode switch

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

ꢀ When connecting this unit with a system device

RS485 cable

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Mode switch

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: ON)

Unit Address : 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

RS485 cable

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

VIDEO

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: OFF

Unit Address : 2

"PS·Data setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 1

I Cascade connection of multiple units

Up to of four units can be connected.

For the cascade connection, connect the CASCADE IN connector and the CASCADE OUT connector on the rear panel of each

unit as below.

Important:

• When connecting the unit in the cascade connection, set "Cascade" of "PS·Data Setup" in "Comm" on the SETUP MENU to

"ON". (Page 130)

• It is impossible to use this connector when connecting the unit in the cascade connection.

ꢀ When no PS·Data compatible device is connected to the system

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Mode switch

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 7: ON)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

ꢀ When the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the first unit

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

Monitor 2

System Controller

Monitor 1

RS485 cable

(provided with

Mode switch

the controller)

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 2

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 4

OUT

VIDEO

ꢀ When the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the third unit

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

Mode switch

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 4

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ESC

ALARM

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

RS485 cable

ꢀ When the PS·Data compatible devices are connected to the first and third units

PS Data Compatible

System Controller

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 1

RS485 cable

(provided with

the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup"

of "Comm" on the

SETUP MENU

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

(No. 7: OFF)

(No. 8: OFF)

Monitor 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 4

OUT

VIDEO

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 5

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

RS485 cable

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

I Connection with the RS485 camera

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the RS485 devices.

Up to eight cameras can be connected using a single RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Important:

• Terminate both devices on both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the descriptions

of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel.

• When connecting an RS485 camera, it is necessary to set each item of "RS485 Setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU

according to the RS485 settings of the camera. (Refer to page 131.)

• The total length of the RS485 cable from this unit is 1 200 meters at the maximum.

ꢀ 1:1 connection

Connect a camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When the RS485 cameras are connected to the CAMERA IN connectors 9 and 13:

Mode switch

(No. 1, No. 4 : ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Unit No.13

Termination: ON

Unit No.9

Termination: ON

Combination Cameras

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

4-wire communication

2-wire communication

No.2

OFF

RS485 (1)

No.3

No.5

OFF

RS485 (2)

No.6

ꢀ Daisy connection

Multiple cameras can be connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When cameras 1 - 4 are connected to the CAMERA IN connectors 1 - 4 and cameras 9 - 12 are connected to the

RS485 (CAMERA) port 1.

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Nos. 1,2,3,4,5,6 : ON

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

Unit No. 12 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 9

Termination: Termination: Termination: Termination:

ON OFF OFF OFF

Combination cameras (RS485 compatible)

Unit No. 4

Unit No. 3

Unit No. 2

Unit No. 1

Termination: Termination: Termination: Termination:

OFF

Combination cameras (coaxial communication

compatible)

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

4-wire communication

2-wire communication

No.2

OFF

RS485 (1)

No.3

No.5

OFF

RS485 (2)

No.6

I Mode Switch

RS485 interface is used to communicate between this unit and the PS·Data compatible system device. In this case, it is neces-

sary to terminate both devices on both ends of the RS485 connection.

The settings of the mode switch will be different depending on whether this unit is used as a receiver or a controller.

When an RS 485 camera is connected to this unit, it is necessary to terminate both devices on both ends of the connection.

• When connecting this unit with the system controller and

this is installed at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data termination switch 1: ON

RS485 (1) terminating switch

RS485 (1) 2/4-wire changeover

RS485 (2) terminating switch

• When connecting a system device and this unit is installed

at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data terminating switch 2: ON

RS485 (2) 2/4-wire changeover

PS•Data terminating switch 1

PS•Data terminating switch 2

• When connecting RS485 cameras

Set the termination switch of the connected RS485 (CAMERA)

port to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the RS485 (1)

termination switch to ON.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the RS485 (2)

termination switch to ON.

• For 2-wire communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to ON.

• For 4-wire communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to OFF.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to OFF.

I RS485 Port

Internal block diagram

DATA

TA TB RA RB

Output Input

I How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM/CONTROL Connector

These terminals are used for emergency recording, auto time adjustment (Auto Adjust Time), taking measures against power

outages (Shutdown Time), and when installing a buzzer, a lamp, or similar alarm device. They are also used to synchronize

with the sequential display changeover.

The terminal pin array and connections are shown below. The con-

nector used should be compatible with the pin configuration.

Pin array

ALARM/CONTROL

The pin array is different from other disk recorders. Make sure that

the connection is correct referring to the following.

Pin No.

Signal

Operation

Remarks

Ch 8 alarm output

Ch 9 alarm output

Ch 10 alarm output

Ch 11 alarm output

Ch 12 alarm output

Ch 13 alarm output

Ch 14 alarm output

Ch 15 alarm output

Alarm signal output at an event occurrence

Open collector output

24 V max., 100 mA

Only for the WJ-HD316A

(Not available for the WJ-HD309A)

Ch 16 alarm output

Alarm reset input

Canceling the alarm display

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Emergency recording

input

Starting emergency recording signal input

Earth (Grounding)

!, !

Alarm output for available

disk space of device con-

nected to copy port

Generation of signal output for disk space alarm- Open collector output

ing of DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R

24 V max., 100 mA

Signal output upon detection of an HDD error

Signal output upon detection of a camera error

Signal output upon detection of a unit error

HDD error output

Camera error output

Error output

End of outage process-

ing

Signal output upon completion of outage pro-

cessing

High (+12 V)

The time of this unit is adjusted to the preset time

30 kΩ 5 V pull-up,

according to the signal input. This signal output is –100 mA/make contact

then generated for the setting time of this unit.

Time of all other units is adjusted to the setting

time of this unit.

Time adjustment I/O

Sequence changeover is affected according to

the signal input. Signal output is generated at the

time of sequence changeover.

Sequence changeover

I/O

The state of alarm suspension is assumed

according to the signal input.

Alarm suspension input

Outage detection I/O

Start of outage processing according to the sig-

nal input.

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

External recording mode

changeover

Changeover to the external recording mode

+5 V output

200 mA max.

ꢀ Connection for emergency recording

When the external switch is turned ON, emergency recording will be started.

Resolution, recording time, recording rate and quality for emergency recording can differ according to the settings of

"Emergency REC" of "Recording" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 112.)

(Earth)

(Emergency record input)

External switch

ALARM/CONTROL

ꢀ Connection for external recording changeover

When the external switch is turned ON, the recording program changeover is affected for recording.

The recording program can be set for "EXT" with the "Time Table" of "Schedule" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 121.)

(Earth)

(External recording mode)

External switch

ALARM/CONTROL

ꢀ Connection to synchronize the sequential display changeover (when multiple

units are used)

Sequential display changeover is affected by the timing of supplied signals to the sequence changeover input terminal. When

multiple units are used, the sequence timing can be synchronized.

Setting for the sequence timing can be set with "Sequence Timing" of "Switcher" on the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page 125.)

For the synchronization of the sequence timing between multiple units, there is a difference in the sequence timing setting as

shown below between the synchronized side (Master) and the synchronizing side (Slave).

Synchronized side (Master): Set at "INT" (functioning as an output terminal)

Synchronizing side (Slave): Set at "EXT" (functioning as an input terminal)

(Earth)

(Sequence changeover input)

(Sequence changeover output)

ALARM/CONTROL

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

(First unit)

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

(Second unit)

ꢀ Connection for the Auto Adjust Time function

• When "Auto Adjust Time" of "System" on the SETUP MENU is set to "MASTER"

"Time Adjust Output" becomes available and the clock of this unit can be applied to other units.

Terminal block of other units

Front LED

(Earth)

(Time adjust output)

monitor

output

ALARM/CONTROL

• When "Auto Adjust Time" of "System" on the SETUP MENU is set to "SLAVE"

"Time Adjust Input" becomes available. When a signal output from other equipment is supplied to the time adjust I/O terminals

between 00 minutes 00 seconds and 14 minutes 59 seconds every hour or between 45 minutes 00 seconds and 59 minutes

59 seconds every hour, the clock will be set to "00 minutes 00 seconds" of the closest hour.

Example:

Signal is supplied at 2:50:00 (hour:minute:second)pm → Set at 3:00:00 pm

Signal input supplied at 3:14:45 pm → Set at 3:00:00 pm

Signal is supplied at 3:20:00 pm → Time will not be adjusted.

Terminal block of other units

Front LED

(Earth)

(Time adjust input)

monitor

output

ALARM/CONTROL

Important:

• When “SLAVE" is selected, the auto time adjustment function works differently depending on the recording status as fol-

lows:

When no recording is being performed

When manual recording is being performed

When schedule recording is being performed

The clock will be adjusted when the clock becomes inaccu-

rate beyond 5 seconds.

When event recording is being performed ^*1

When emergency recording is being performed

The clock will not be adjusted.

^*1: When event recording is performed on any camera channel

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds when the clock is adjusted during recording.

ꢀ Connection with the Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)

This is an example of connection with the uninterruptible power system (UPS) to be installed to protect from a power outage.

When a signal is supplied to the outage detection I/O terminals from the uninterruptible power system (UPS), internal process-

ing (stops recording safely) will be started to shut off the power supply for this unit.

After completing the internal processing, a signal will be supplied from the outage processing end output terminal to the unin-

terruptible power system (UPS). Then, the power supply to this unit can be suspended.

(Earth)

(COM)

(Detection)

(Shutdown)

(Outage detection I/O)

(Outage processing end output)

* Refer to the operating

instructions of the used

product for further

This unit

information about

connection of the UPS side.

Uninterruptible

power system

(UPS)

Power cable

To an AC outlet

ALARM/CONTROL

ꢀ Connection of the control output

• When an alarm device such as a buzzer or a lamp is connected, the signal output from Pin Nos. 15 - 18 can be used to

notify the status by sounding a buzzer or lighting a lamp.

• The following example is of a connection with the HDD error output (pin no. 16).

(Earth)

(HDD error output)

Alarming device

Relay, etc.

Install according

to your needs

ALARM/CONTROL

I How to Use the Terminals of the ALARM Connector

These terminals are used to connect the alarm devices, such as sensors, door switches, etc.

The pin configurations of these terminals are as shown below. The connector used should be compatible with the pin configu-

ration.

Pin Configuration

ALARM

The pin array is different from other disk recorders. Make sure that the connection is correct by referring to the following.

Pin No.

Signal

Ch 1 alarm input

Ch 2 alarm input

Ch 3 alarm input

Ch 4 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm input

Ch 6 alarm input

Ch 7 alarm input

Ch 8 alarm input

Ch 1 alarm output

Ch 2 alarm output

Ch 3 alarm output

Ch 4 alarm output

Earth (Grounding)

Ch 9 alarm input

Ch 10 alarm input

Ch 11 alarm input

Ch 12 alarm input

Ch 13 alarm input

Ch 14 alarm input

Ch 15 alarm input

Ch 16 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm output

Ch 6 alarm output

Ch 7 alarm output

Operation

Remarks

Event action will be performed according

to the settings.

Non-voltage make contact/–100 mA,

5 V pull-up

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event

occurrence

Open collector output/24 V, 100 mA

!, !

Event action will be performed according

to the setting.

Non-voltage make contact input/

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Only for the WJ-HD316A

(Not available for the WJ-HD309A)

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event

occurrence

Open collector output/24 V max.,

100 mA

ꢀ Alarm connection

When a signal is supplied to the alarm input terminals of CH 1-16, recording and displaying of camera images will be per-

formed according to the settings.

When an alarm device such as a buzzer, a lamp, etc., is installed outside, connect them to the alarm output terminals (pin nos.

9 - 12, pin nos. 23 - 25) or to the alarm output terminals (pin nos. 1 - 9) of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal.

Sensor

Security door

switch

(Earth)

! q

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

Install according to

your needs.

ALARM

(Ch 1 alarm output)

(Earth)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

ALARM/CONTROL

Install according to

your needs.

(Ch 16 alarm output)

Time and polarities of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal and the ALARM terminal

Terminal

Active time

Note

Alarm input

100 ms or more

N.O.: L active

N.C.: H active

Alarm output

The set time on the SETUP MENU

100 ms or more

L active

Alarm reset input

Emergency recording input

100 ms or more

Alarm output for available disk space of While the size of the available disk

device connected to the copy port

space is less than the set size

Until the HDD error is cleared

Until the camera error is cleared

Until the error is cleared

100 ms

HDD error output

L active

H active

L active

Camera error output

Error output

Outage processing end output

Time adjust I/O

Input: 100 ms or more

Output: 1 s

Sequence changeover output

Outage detection output

100 ms or more

L active

External recording mode changeover

Alarm suspend output

L active, judged by level

I How to Use the SERIAL Connector

This connector is compliant with the RS232C Standard, and is used to communicate with a connected PC.

A connection example and the pin configuration of the SERIAL connector are as shown below.

Important:

When using the SERIAL connector, it is necessary to perform the settings with "RS232C Setup" of "Comm" on the SETUP

MENU for the communication functions. (Page 132)

ꢀ Pin Configuration

Serial connector of this unit

D-sub Pin 9 (Female)

Personal computer side

D-sub Pin 9 (Female)

(Locally procured)

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

PC or another device

Connection example of cross cable

ꢀ Connection example

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

SETUP

To operate this unit, it is necessary to set each item of the SETUP MENU in advance.

Using the SETUP MENU (Quick) and the SETUP MENU (Advanced)

First, check the setting items of the SETUP MENU (Quick) and perform the settings. When more detailed settings are required,

perform the settings on the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Refer to page 101 for descriptions about the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Perform the settings for each item of the SETUP MENU by displaying the SETUP MENU on monitor 2.

Settings items are as below.

I About the SETUP MENU (Quick)

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Live image

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC & Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Main area

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

Menu: These menus are always displayed on the SETUP MENU (Quick).

Live image: Live images from the camera channel that was selected just before the SETUP MENU (Quick) was displayed, will

be displayed in this area.

Main area: The setting items of the selected menu will be displayed in this area.

I Item list of the SETUP MENU (Quick)

Settings menu

Display

Description

Page

Perform the display settings such as the display position of the camera title and

time, and the settings for other basic operations of this unit.

REC & Event

Network

Perform the basic settings for recording and alarm operation.

Perform the basic network settings.

100

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Display" menu.

I [Display]

Perform the time and date, display settings such as the

time and date display, the camera title display, the sequen-

tial display and the language setting.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

SETUP MENU

Quick

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Advanced Menu

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

z Move the cursor to "Camera Title" using the arrows but-

Advanced Menu

ton (C D) and press the SET button.

8Date Format

[Screenshot 2]

The "Camera Title" pop-up window will be displayed.

Select a display format for the date from the following. (Ex.

April 1, 2004)

YY.MM.DD: 04.4.1

MMM.DD.YY: APR.1.04

DD.MMM.YY: 1.APR.04

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Quick

Camera Title

CAM1

Display

REC Event

Network

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

12h

_CAM2I

_CAM3I

Time Format

Time & Date

CAM4I

CAM5

JAN

10 00 00 PM

CAM6

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

CAM7

Time & Date Display Position

_CAM8I

_CAM9I

Camera Title

CAM10 Cam10era Title Display Position

R-LOWER

SETUP

CAM11

8Time Format

Liv¹e¹Sequence

CAM12

CAM13

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

AUTO

ENGLISH

CAM14

Beep (Operation)

Select a display format for the time from the following. (Ex.

3 o’ clock in the afternoon)

CAM15

CAM16

Language

Advanced Menu

12h: 3:00:00 PM

24h: 15:00:00

x Move the cursor to "CAM1" using the arrows button.

8Time & Date

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM1".

Adjust the current time and date.

Enter year, month, day, hour, minute and second in order,

move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Quick

Camera Title

CAM1

Display

REC Event

Network

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

12h

_CAM2I

_CAM3I

Important:

Time Format

Time & Date

CAM4I

CAM5

CAM6

JAN

10 00 00 PM

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after set-

ting the date and time.

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

CAM7

Time & Date Display Position

_CAM8I

_CAM9I

Camera Title

CAM10 Cam10era Title Display Position

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

Liv¹e¹Sequence

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

AUTO

ENGLISH

Beep (Operation)

CAM15

CAM16

8Time & Date Display Position

Language

Advanced Menu

Select a time and date display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper left of the screen.

R-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper right of the

screen.

c Select a character to be entered by rotating the jog dial.

Up to 16 characters can be entered.

L-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower left of the screen.

R-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower right of the

screen.

v Move the cursor to the right side of the entered charac-

ter using the arrows button (B).

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the camera title.

Notes:

• When setting the time and date to be recorded together

with images, the time display will be recorded in the

selected position.

The available characters for a camera title are different

depending on the selected language as follows.

• Refer to page 111 for further information about

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)".

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u

v w x y z À Ä Â Æ Ç É Ì Ñ Ò Ö Ù Ü Ø ß à á â ä å æ ç è

é ê ë ì í î ï ñ ò ó ô ö ù ú û ü ø ? " # & ( ) * + , - . / : ; SP

8Camera Title

Perform the settings for the camera title. It is possible to

display a camera title on the monitor 1/monitor 2, and

record it as a part of the recorded image (page 111). Do

the following to set the camera title.

[Screenshot 1]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W

X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Ä Å Ç É Ñ Ö › Ü

á à â ä ã å ç é è ê ë í ì î ï ñ ó ò ô ö õ ú ù û ü ? " # & ( )

* + , - . / : ; SP

Start operation from the "Display" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12h

REC

Event

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

R-LOWER

SETUP

Note: To correct the entered characters, move the cur-

sor to the character to be corrected and press the

STOP button to delete it. Enter a correct character

after deleting.

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

Camera Title Display Position

Live Sequence

Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Beep (Operation)

Language

AUTO

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

[Screenshot 4]

The camera title is entered.

z Move the cursor to "Live Sequence" using the arrows

button (C D) and press the SET button.

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Quick

Camera Title

[Screenshot 2]

The "Live Sequence" pop-up menu will be displayed.

CAM1

Display

REC Event

Network

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

12h

_CAM2I

_CAM3I

ENTRANCE

Time Format

Time & Date

CAM4I

CAM5

CAM6

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

L-UPPER

SETUP

CAM7

Time & Date Display Position

_CAM8I

_CAM9I

Camera Title

CAM10 Cam10era Title Display Position

R-LOWER

SETUP

CAM11

Liv¹e¹Sequence

SETUP MENU

Quick

CAM12

CAM13

LIVE

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

AUTO

ENGLISH

CAM14

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Beep (Operation)

CAM15

CAM16

Display

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

_Event2

Language

2 Time F--ormat 2s

--12h

REC

Time & Date

Advanced Menu

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

Time & Date Display Position

L-UPPER

8 Camer--a Title 2s

-- SETU2sP

Camera Title Display Position

R-LOWER

Live Sequence

SETUP

b Press the SETUP/ESC button.

Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

AUTO

14Beep (

peration

)

--ON

Language

ENGLISH

→ The camera title will be set and the setting window

Advanced Menu

of the camera title will be closed.

Note: It is possible to set "Camera Title [Display]" to dis-

play a camera title on monitor 2 and "Camera Title

[Embedded]" to embed/display a camera title on

monitor 1 individually using a PC via a network.

Refer to the Network Setup Instruction (PDF) for fur-

ther information.

x Move the cursor to "CAM" of "STEP 1" using the arrows

button.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM".

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

8Camera Title Display Position

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Display

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

_Event2

2 Time F--ormat 2s

--12h

REC

Select a camera title display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays a camera title at the upper left of the

ITime & Date

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

Time & Date Display Position

L-UPPER

8 Camer--a Title 2s

-- SETU2sP

Camera Title Display Position

R-LOWER

screen.

Live Sequence

SETUP

Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

AUTO

L-LOWER: Displays a camera title at the lower left of the

14Beep (

peration

)

--ON

Language

ENGLISH

screen.

Advanced Menu

R-UPPER: Displays a camera title at the upper right of the

screen.

c Select how to display images from camera channels in

"STEP 1" from the following by rotating the jog dial.

1, 2, ... , 16: Displays an image from the selected cam-

era channel on a single screen.

R-LOWER: Displays a camera title at the lower right of the

screen.

CENTER: Displays a camera title at the center of the

screen.

1 - 4: Displays images from camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

5 - 8: Displays images from camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

Note: When setting the camera title to be recorded togeth-

er with images, the camera title display will be embed-

ded in the selected position.

9 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a

4-split screen.

Refer to page 111 for further information about

"Embedded REC (title)".

9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

1 - 9: Displays images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a

9-split screen.

8Live Sequence

Perform the settings for the sequential display of live

images as follows.

10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

--: Skips the selected step.

8Beep (Operation)

Select ON or OFF whether or not to sound the buzzer when

operating the buttons.

ON: Sounds the buzzer when operating the buttons.

OFF: Does not sound the buzzer when operating the but-

tons.

v When displaying images from camera channels "1 - 16"

on a single screen is selected in step 3, select the cam-

era position.

Move the cursor to "PRESET" in "STEP 1" using the

arrows button.

8Language

Select a language for the SETUP MENU from the following.

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇIS/ESPAÑOL/DEUTSCH/

ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

[Screenshot 4]

The cursor moves to the "PRESET" in "STEP 1".

Important:

SETUP MENU

Quick

Displaying the language of the browser used to access

the unit from a PC will not be changed even though this

setting is changed.

LIVE

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Display

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

_Event2

2 Time F--ormat 2s

--12h

REC

Time & Date

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

Time & Date Display Position

L-UPPER

8 Camer--a Title 2s

-- SETU2sP

Camera Title Display Position

R-LOWER

Live Sequence

SETUP

Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

AUTO

14Beep (

peration

)

--ON

Language

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

b Rotate the jog dial to select a preset position number

for which image is displayed in "STEP 1" from the follow-

ing.

1 - 256: Moves to the selected preset number.

--: Does not move to the preset position.

n Select "DWELL" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 5]

The cursor moves to"DWELL" in "STEP 1".

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Display

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

_Event2

2 Time F--ormat 2s

--12h

REC

Time & Date

Network

JAN

10 00 00 PM

SET

Time & Date Display Position

L-UPPER

8 Camer--a Title 2s

-- SETU2sP

Camera Title Display Position

R-LOWER

Live Sequence

SETUP

Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

AUTO

14Beep (

peration

)

--ON

Language

ENGLISH

Advanced Menu

m Rotate the jog dial to select an interval time to go to the

next sequential step from 1 - 30 seconds (in 1 second

intervals).

The sequence step is skipped when "0 s" is selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 7 to set for the other sequence

steps.

, Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The settings for the sequential display are set and

the sequence setting menu closes.

8Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Select the method of switching to summer time from the fol-

lowing.

OUT: Does not function.

IN: Applies summer time.

AUTO: Applies summer time in accordance with the setting

of summer time.

[Screenshot 2]

The REC Camera pop-up menu will be displayed.

I [REC & Event]

Perform the settings for the basic recording and the set-

tings for event actions of each event type (motion detection,

video loss, command alarm and terminal alarm.)

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

REC Type

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

REC Camera

Resolution

REC

Event

Network

REC Camera

Manual REC

REC Rate

30ips / 16CH

SETUP MENU

Quick

Quality

FQB

LIVE

Event REC

REC Rate

30ips / 16CH

Display

REC Type

REC Camera

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

Quality

Time

Operation Mode

FQB

30s

ALARM

REC

Event

Network

30ips / 16CH

FQB

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

Advanced Menu

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

30ips / 16CH

FQB

Time

30s

Operation Mode

ALARM

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

x Select the desired camera channel for manual record-

ing/event recording using the arrows button (C D A

B) and rotate the jog dial. It is possible to select a cam-

era channel by pressing a camera channel selection

button (1 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A, 1 - 9 for the WJ-

HD309A) on the front panel of the unit.

Advanced Menu

8REC Type

Select "QUICK" or "ADVANCED" for validation of the record-

ing settings.

QUICK: The recording settings set on the SETUP MENU

(Quick) will be validated when recording.

c Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The settings will be applied and the "REC camera"

pop-up menu will be closed.

ADVANCED: The recording settings set on the SETUP

MENU (Advanced) will be validated when recording.

8Resolution

Note: When "QUICK" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event", the SETUP MENU (Quick) will be displayed by

pressing the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more.

When "ADVANCED" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC

& Event", the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be dis-

played by pressing the SETUP/ESC button for 2 sec-

onds or more.

Select a recording resolution from the following.

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480), with camera

shake compensation

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 240)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

8REC Camera

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

when the SETUP MENU (Quick) was closed after changing

the settings.

Select a camera channel for manual recording/event

recording.

Note: It is possible to minimize blurring to record fast mov-

[Screenshot 1]

ing objects by selecting "FRAME 3D ON".

Start operation from the "REC & Event" menu.

8Manual REC

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Perform the recording rate (REC Rate) and the image quali-

ty (Quality) for manual recording.

The following are available for the recording rate.

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/

60 ips/120 ips

Display

REC Type

REC Camera

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

REC

Event

Network

30ips / 16CH

FQB

30ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

Time

Operation Mode

ALARM

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

Advanced Menu

Note: The available recording rate differs depending on the

selected solution.

z Move the cursor to "REC Camera" using the arrows but-

ton (C D) and press the SET button.

Resolution

Maximum recording rate

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF 30 ips

FIELD

SIF

60 ips

120 ips

Note: The camera channel number selected for "REC

Camera" will be displayed next to the selected record-

ing rate.

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

Note: When "MANUAL" is selected for "Time" (recording

duration), recording will be performed for at least 8

seconds at an event occurrence as long as the

alarm is not canceled.

The following are available for "Operation Mode" (event

action mode). Refer to page 49 for further information about

each event action mode.

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

ACT DET (Activity Detection Mode): Performs only

recording, writing an event log and camera movement

to a preset position at an event occurrence. Other event

actions will not be performed.

ALARM (Alarm Mode): Performs every event action

according to the settings.

8Event REC

Perform the recording rate (REC Rate) and the image quali-

ty (Quality) for event recording (recording to be performed

at event occurrence (motion detection, video loss, terminal/

command alarm and terminal alarm)).

OFF: Performs only recording of the event log. Other event

actions will not be performed.

The following are available for "REC Rate" (recording rate).

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/

60 ips/120 ips

8Event Setup

Note: The camera channel number selected for "REC

Camera" will be displayed next to the selected record-

ing rate.

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the

buzzer sound duration for each event type (motion detec-

tion, video loss, command alarm and terminal alarm).

Note: The available recording rate differs depending on the

[Screenshot 1]

selected solution.

Start operation from the "REC & Event" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

Resolution

Maximum recording rate

LIVE

Display

REC Type

REC Camera

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF 30 ips

REC

Event

Network

FIELD

SIF

60 ips

30ips / 16CH

FQB

120 ips

30ips / 16CH

FQB

30s

Time

Operation Mode

ALARM

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

The following are available for "Quality" (image quality).

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

Advanced Menu

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

z Move the cursor to "Event Setup" using the arrows but-

ton (C D) and press the SET button.

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Event Setup" pop-up menu will be displayed.

The following are available for "Time" (recording duration).

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)/20 s/30 s/1 min - 10 min

(in 1 minute intervals)/20 min/30 min/ 40 min/ 50 min/

60 min

MANUAL: Recording duration differs depending on the

event type as follows;

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

REC Type

QUICK

Event Setup

REC Camera

Event

SETUP

REC

VMD

OFF

Resolution

FIELD

Network

Alarm Output

Manual REC

OFF

Buzzer

REC Rate

Video Loss

Quality

30ips / 16CH

FQB

Alarm Output

Event REC

Buzzer

TermRinEaCl/CRoamtemand Alarm

320sips / 16CH

Alarm Output

Quality

FQB

Buzzer

Time

30s

ALARM

Operation Mode

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

When a motion is detected: Recording will be per-

formed for 8 seconds

Advanced Menu

When a video loss has occurred: Recording will be

performed while the video signal is lost.

When a terminal alarm has occurred: Recording will

be performed while the alarm signal is being sup-

plied.

x Move the cursor to the item to be set using the arrows

button (C D), and rotate the jog dial to select the para-

meter.

When a command alarm has occurred: Recording will

be performed for 8 seconds.

The following are available for "Alarm Output" (alarm

output duration).

CONTINUE: Record until the ALARM RESET button is

pressed.

When OFF is selected, the alarm output will not be sup-

plied.

(s: second, min: minute)

OFF: No alarm output is supplied.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

[Screenshot 2]

The "VMD Setup" pop-up menu will be displayed.

EXT: Alarm output will continue until the ALARM RESET

button is pressed.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

REC Type

REC Camera

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

OFF

REC

^EventVMD Setup

The following are available for "Buzzer" (buzzer sound

duration).

Resolution

CAM1

OFF

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Network

Manual REC

CAM2

OFF

REC RaOteFF

OF3F0ips / 16CH

CAM3

OFF

FQB

CAM4

Quality

OFF

CAM5

Event REC

OFF

CAM6

REC Rate

30ips / 16CH

OFF

When OFF is selected, a buzzer will not sound.

(s: second, min: minute)

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

OFF

CAM7

Quality

FQB

OFF

CAM8

Time

30s

Operation Mode

ALARM

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

Advanced Menu

EXT: The buzzer will continue until the ALARM RESET

button is pressed.

x Select the camera channel to be set by using the

OFF: The buzzer will not sound.

arrows button (C D).

c Press the SETUP/ESC button.

c Rotate the jog dial to select ON for a desired camera

channel for which the motion detection function is to be

applied, and press the SET button.

→ The settings for "Alarm Output" and "Buzzer" will be

applied and the "Event Setup" pop-up menu will be

closed.

[Screenshot 3]

8Power ON Manual REC

The "VMD Area Setup" window will be displayed.

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to start

recording when the power is turned on by the connected

external timer (or the switch).

ON: Manual recording will start automatically after complet-

ing the system check.

OFF: Manual recording will not start automatically after

completing the system check.

Important:

When ON is selected, manual recording will start auto-

matically after completing the system check.

v Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the start point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button, and press the SET button.

8VMD Setup

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or dis-

able the motion detection function for each camera chan-

nel.

When ON is selected, perform the settings for the motion

detection area for each camera channel. Up to 4 areas can

be set for a camera channel for the detection area. Refer to

page 114 for further information about the motion detection

function.

Note: To set all areas on the monitor as the motion

detection area, select "ALL AREAS" and press the

SET button.

[Screenshot 4]

The start point of the motion detection area is assigned.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "REC & Event" menu.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

REC Type

REC Camera

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

Quality

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

REC

Event

Network

30ips / 16CH

FQB

Event REC

REC Rate

Quality

30ips / 16CH

FQB

Time

Operation Mode

30s

ALARM

b Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the end point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET button.

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

Advanced Menu

z Move the cursor to "VMD Setup" using the arrows button

(C D) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 5]

I [Network]

Perform the settings for the network such as the IP address

and the gateway address when operating this unit a PC via

a network such as a LAN.

The motion detection area is set with the start point and the

end point as the points at opposite angles of the motion

detection area.

SETUP MENU

Quick

LIVE

Display

Line Speed

HTTP Port Number

DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

AUTO

00080

OFF

192 168 000 250

255 255 255 000

192 168 000 001

REC

Event

Network

Advanced Menu

n Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set another motion detection

8Line Speed

area.

Up to 4 areas can be set. The newly created areas will

be named automatically as A, B, C and D in the order of

creation.

The following are available for "Line Speed".

AUTO: Line speed will be applied automatically.

10-HALF: 10 Mbps half duplex

10-FULL: 10 Mbps full duplex

m To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

100-HALF: 100 Mbps half duplex

100-FULL: 100 Mbps full duplex

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 6]

Note: When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the

The "VMD Setup" window will be closed and the "VMD

Setup" pop-up menu will be displayed.

line speed, the unit will automatically restart.

8HTTP Port Number

SETUP MENU

Quick

Specify the HTTP port number to be used to transfer

images from this unit. It is not necessary to change it for

normal use.

LIVE

Display

REC Type

REC Camera

QUICK

SETUP

FIELD

OFF

REC

^EventVMD Setup

Resolution

CAM1

OFF

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Network

Manual REC

CAM2

OFF

REC RaOteFF

OF3F0ips / 16CH

CAM3

OFF

FQB

CAM4

Quality

OFF

CAM5

Event REC

OFF

CAM6

REC Rate

30ips / 16CH

OFF

CAM7

Quality

FQB

OFF

8DHCP

CAM8

Time

30s

Operation Mode

ALARM

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the DHCP server.

When obtaining IP addresses, net mask and a gateway

address from the DHCP server, set to ON.

Event Setup

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

SETUP

OFF

SETUP

Advanced Menu

If not, set to OFF and enter those addresses manually.

ON: Uses the DHCP server.

OFF: Does not use the DHCP server.

, Press the SETUP/ESC button.

→ The "VMD Setup" pop-up menu will be closed.

Notes:

8IP Address

• Refer to page 115 for descriptions of how to delete

the motion detection area.

• It is possible to set the sensitivity and the detection

mode (method of detection) of each detection area.

Refer to page 115 for further information.

Enter an IP address when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

For this unit, enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-

254).

8Subnet Mask

Enter a subnet mask according to the network configuration

when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

8Gateway

Enter the gateway address according to the network con-

figuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

100

I About the SETUP MENU (Advanced)

Main menu

Live image

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Comm

Maintenance

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Main area

Submenu

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

Quick Menu

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Main menu: These menus are always displayed on the SETUP MENU (Advanced).

Live image: Live images from the camera channel that was selected just before the SETUP MENU (Advanced) was displayed,

will be displayed in this area.

Submenu: The setting items of the selected submenu will be displayed in this area.

Main area: The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed on the left side of the SETUP MENU (Advanced). The

submenus differ depending on the selected main menu.

Notes:

• The SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be displayed on monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. (It is impossible to display the SETUP

MENU (Advanced) on monitor 1.)

• The same images displayed on monitor 2 will be displayed on the VGA monitor.

I Item list of the SETUP MENU

Settings menu

System

Description

Page

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

Perform the settings for the basic operation of this unit.

105

106

107

Perform the settings for the time adjustment and display of the time and date.

Perform the settings for the user registration and the user authentication such as

user name, password and operational level.

User Edit

Edit the registered user information.

Delete registered users.

108

User Delete

Host Regist.

as IP address and operational level for the host authentication.

Host Edit

Edit the registered hosts.

109

110

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Delete the registered hosts.

Perform the settings to specify operable functions for each level.

The set contents can be saved or loaded.

Recording

REC Setup

Perform the basic settings for recording.

111

112

Emergency REC

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as recording time and record-

ing rate.

101

Settings menu

Description

Page

Event

Event Setup

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the buzzer sound when an

event (motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm) occurs.

114

VMD Setup

Perform the settings for the motion detection area, sensitivity and the detection

mode for each camera channel.

Alarm Setup

Perform the settings for the alarm display duration and alarm suspension duration.

Specify the alarm terminal polarity.

117

118

Terminal Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Create timetables for each day of the week, and assign the recording action pro-

grams and event action programs to the created timetables.

121

REC Program

Up to 4 recording programs can be created. Perform the settings for the recording

actions for each program such as image quality and recording rate for each cam-

era channel.

119

120

123

Event Program

Special Days

Up to 4 event programs can be created. Perform the settings for each program

such as the event action and the auto copy function for each event type.

Assign timetables independently for special days aside from other days.

Switcher

Monitor1

Perform the settings for the image switching on monitor 1 such as the setting of

the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on monitor 1.

124

126

Monitor 2

Perform the settings for the image switching on monitor 2 such as the setting of

the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on monitor 2.

Display

OSD Setup

Monitor1

Monitor2

Perform the display settings such as the settings for the display position of the

camera title and the time.

127

128

129

Perform the display settings for monitor 1 such as the camera title display on/off,

the alarm display on/off and the time display on/off.

Perform the display settings for monitor 2 such as the display mode (task bar

style), the camera title display position, and the camera title display on/off.

Comm

Camera Control

Set the communication type to control cameras for each camera channel.

130

PS·Data Setup

Perform the settings for the PS·Data. It is necessary to perform these settings

when connecting an external device such as a controller to the DATA port on the

rear panel of this unit.

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

Perform the settings for the RS485. It is necessary to perform these settings when

connecting an RS485 compatible camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port on the rear

panel of this unit.

131

132

133

134

Perform the settings for the SERIAL (RS232C). It is necessary to perform these

settings when connecting a PC to the SERIAL connector on the rear panel of this

unit.

Perform the basic network settings. It is necessary to perform these settings when

operating this unit via a network such as a LAN. The settings for the user authenti-

cation and the host authentication can also be set with these settings.

Perform the network connection settings such as IP addresses and the gateway

address. It is necessary to perform these settings when operating this unit via a

network such as a LAN.

Perform the NTP server settings such as the NTP server address and the time

zone setting. It is necessary to synchronize the clock with the NTP server.

102

Settings menu

Maintenance

Description

Page

REC Rate

Display the recording rate for each recording mode and image quality for each

camera channel in list form.

135

136

Disk Info

Display hard disk information such as the available disk space on the built-in hard

disk and the connected optional extension unit.

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Display version information of the software and the hardware and the MAC

address.

Set actions to be taken when the available space of the built-in hard disk or of the

connected external recording device reaches a specified level.

Set to display a warning when the available space of the built-in hard disk or of the

connected external recording device reaches a specified level.

Delete data stored on the hard disk, or format (initialize) the DVD-RAM disk con-

nected to the COPY port.

Event Log

Error Log

Display the event log. Refer to page 49 for further information.

Display the error log such as a HDD error log.

137

138

Access Log

Display the time, user name and IP addresses when logging in/out to/from this

unit.

Note: Refer to page 139 for further information about the settings using the setup menu of camera.

103

I Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU (Advanced)

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more

when displaying live images.

v Perform the settings for each item.

Item selection: Move the cursor using the arrows but-

ton (C D A B).

Change the setting: Rotate the jog dial.

When "QUICK" is selected for "REC Type" of "REC &

Event" (pages 97 and 111), the SETUP MENU (Quick)

will be displayed. In this case, it is possible to display

the SETUP MENU (Advanced) by pressing the SET but-

ton after selecting "Advanced Menu" on the SETUP

MENU (Quick) using the arrows button (CD).

Pop-up display of the setting item: Press the SET but-

ton when the setting item has the "SETUP" button

next to the item name.

Turning pages of the settings menu: When "PREV/

NEXT PAGE" is displayed on the bottom of the set-

tings menu, move the cursor to the "PREV/NEXT

PAGE" using the arrows button, and then use the

arrows button (AB) to turn the pages.

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be dis-

played.

Selecting a submenu again: Press the SET button.

The cursor will be able to select a submenu again.

Displaying the SETUP MENU (Quick): Move the cur-

sor to "Quick Menu" using the arrows button (C D

A B), and press the SET button.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

*****

Time

Date

PSD User

User Regist.

User Edit

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

b After completing the settings, press the SETUP/ESC

button for 2 seconds or more to apply the settings. The

SETUP MENU (Advanced) will be closed.

10s

OFF

→ Live images will be displayed again.

x Select a main menu using the arrows button (C D A

B) and press the SET button.

Important:

If the settings are changed, all login users will be

forcibly logged out.

[Screenshot 2]

The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Setup

REC Type

Recording

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Color Mode

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

QUICK

OFF

All

COLOR STD

Emergency REC

REC Priority

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Audio Allocation

Quick Menu

c Select the submenu using the arrows button (CD) and

press the SET button.

When selecting the submenu by the cursor is enabled,

press the SETUP/ESC button. The main menu can be

selected.

[Screenshot 3]

The setting items will be displayed in the main area and the

cursor will move to a setting item.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Setup

Resolution

Recording Time

Recording Rate and Quality

FIELD

10s

Emergency REC

RATE

3ips

Quality

RATE

3ips

Quality

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

SFA CAM9

SFA CAM10

SFA

SFA CAM12

SFA CAM13

SFA CAM14

SFA CAM15

SFA CAM16

SFA

CAM11

Auto Copy

OFF

Quick Menu

104

I [System] Settings on System

Perform the following system settings required to operate

this unit.

OFF: Does not activate the auto logout function.

1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min/30 min: Activates the auto

logout function when the selected time has passed after

ꢀ [Basic Setup] Basic system settings

Perform the following settings for basic operation.

Important:

• The auto logout function will not be activated when ON

is selected for "Auto Login".

• Depending on the user level of the auto login user,

operable functions may be different.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

*****

Time

Date

PSD User

User Regist.

User Edit

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ADMIN

8Priority

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

OFF

Follow the priority.

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

Assign operating priorities when multiple users access this

unit simultaneously from the following.

10s

OFF

Follow the priority: Operation by a user with a higher pri-

ority will be performed. When the priorities of the first

and the last accessed user are the same, post-priority

will be applied.

Pre-priority: Operation by the first accessed user will be

performed regardless of priority.

8ADMIN Password

Set the password for an administrator.

Enter 4-8 alphanumeric characters.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete char-

acters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to

page 59 about the characters available.

Post-priority: Operation by the last accessed user will be

performed regardless of priority.

8"GO TO LAST" before

Important:

Select time to be skipped to when the "GO TO LAST" button

is pressed during playback from the following.

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/5 min

To enhance the security, change the password for an

administrator periodically.

8PSD User

8Language

When a user operates a controller compatible with PS·Data,

operation will be restricted by the priority and operational

level of the PSD user.

A PSD user should be one of the users registered in this

unit.

Select a language for the SETUP MENU from the following.

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/DEUTSCH/

ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

Important:

Displaying the language of the browser used to access

the unit from a PC will not be changed even though this

setting is changed.

8Auto Login

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the auto login

function.

ON: Activates the auto login function.

OFF: Does not activate the auto login function. It is neces-

sary to perform the login operation every time this unit is

started up.

8Beep (Operation)

Select ON or OFF whether or not to sound the buzzer when

operating the buttons.

ON: Sounds the buzzer when operating the buttons.

OFF: Does not sound the buzzer when operating the but-

tons.

8Auto Login User

When ON is selected for "Auto Login", the user registered

as an auto login user in this setting can log into the unit

automatically.

8Buzzer (Error)

Select a buzzer operation when a problem has occurred

from the following.

An auto login user should be one of the users registered in

this unit.

OFF: Does not sound buzzer when a problem has

occurred.

8Auto Logout

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min - 5 min

(in 1 minute intervals): A buzzer will sound for the

selected duration after a problem has occurred.

EXT: The buzzer will sound continuously until the "ALARM

RESET" button on the front panel of the unit is pressed.

Select ON or OFF whether or not to activate the auto logout

function.

When ON is selected, auto logout will be carried out after a

specified time has passed while displaying live images

without operation.

105

YY.MM.DD: 04.4.1

8Shutdown Time

MMM.DD.YY: APR.1.04

DD.MMM.YY: 1.APR.04

Select a waiting time before starting the internal processing

against the power outage after an outage detection signal

has been supplied to the unit from the following.

8Time Format

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

Select a display format for the time from the following. (Ex.

3 o’ clock in the afternoon)

12h: 3:00:00 PM

8Auto Copy

ON or OFF whether or not to copy recorded images to the

copy area on the hard disk or a DVD-RAM disk automatical-

ly.

24h: 15:00:00

8Time & Date

OFF: Does not copy automatically.

Adjust the current time and date.

Enter year, month, day, hour, minute and second in order,

move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET button.

COPY1: Copies recorded images to the DVD-RAM disk

connected to the COPY1 port.

COPY1 (ALT): Copies recorded images with an alteration

detection code using the viewer software to the DVD-

RAM disk connected to the COPY1 port.

Important:

Recording will stop for around 4 seconds just after set-

ting the date and time.

COPY2: Copies recorded images to the DVD-RAM disk

connected to the COPY2 port.

COPY2 (ALT): Copies recorded images with an alteration

detection code using the viewer software to the DVD-

RAM disk connected to the COPY2 port.

HDD: Copies recorded images to the copy area on the

hard disk of this unit.

8Auto Adjust Time

Select a method for auto time adjustment from the follow-

ing.

When "MASTER" is selected, a signal will be supplied from

the ALARM/CONTROL connector as the MASTER time (see

below) at the specified time.

Important:

• When OFF is selected, the auto copy function at an

event occurrence and emergency recording will not

function.

• The auto copy will not work if a DVD-RAM disk drive is

not connected even though "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" is

selected.

• Images recorded (by pre-event recording) in the pre-

recording area in the extension unit will not be copied

automatically.

OFF: Does not function.

MASTER: A signal will be supplied from the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear and the clock of the other

devices will be adjusted with reference to the time of

this unit.

SLAVE: A signal will be supplied to the ALARM/CONTROL

connector on the rear and the clock of this unit will be

adjusted.

• When emergency recording/event recordings are per-

formed frequently, it may be possible that the auto copy

function does not function.

Important:

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

when changing the present time (accurate to within

• Images to be copied automatically will be 30 minute’s

worth of images recorded from the start of emergency

recording/event recording.

seconds) using the time adjustment input (pin no.20) of

the ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel.

8Master Time

Specify the time when supplying a signal from the

ALARM/CONTROL connector.

ꢀ [Time & Date] Setting of the date and time

Perform the following settings of the time and date.

8Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Select the method of switching to summer time from the fol-

lowing.

OUT: Does not function.

IN: Applies summer time.

AUTO: Applies summer time in accordance with the setting

of summer time (see below).

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12H

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

JAN

12 00 00

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)Table

SETUP

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

8Summer Time (Day Light Savings) Table

Do the following to specify the start time and date and the

end time and date of summer time.

8Date Format

Select a display format for the date from the following. (Ex.

April 1, 2004)

106

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Time & Date" menu.

• It is impossible to set time for summer time if the

duration between the set time for "OUT" and "IN" is

less than an hour.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

Time & Date

MMM.DD.YY

12H

Time

Date

ꢀ [User Regist.] Registration of a user who

User Regist.

User Edit

JAN

12 00 00

SET

OFF

12 :00 AM

operates this unit

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)Table

SETUP

word.

After filling out the user information, move the cursor to

"SET" at the lower right of the menu and press the SET but-

ton to complete registration.

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Table" using the arrows button (C D) and press the

SET button.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

User Name

Basic Setup

Time

Date

User Password

User Regist.

User Edit

[Screenshot 2]

The "Summer Time (Day Light Savings) Table" will be dis-

played.

LV1

CAM1

Level

Priority

Default Screen

I Camera Partitioning

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View/Operate

View/Operate CAM10 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM11 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM12 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM13 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM14 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM15 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM16 View/Operate

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

SET

Recording

Event

Schedule

1^System

SETUP MENU

Advanced

ON JUN

LIVE

OFF

Switcher

Display

Comm

Maintenance

Basic Setup

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

ON JUN

Time Format

OFF

Time

Date

JAN

10 10 10

SET

User Regist.

User Edit

8User Name

OFF

ON JUN

10 :00

Auto Adjust Time

OFF

MASTER Time

AUTO

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ON -- --

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

OFF

Enter 4-14 alphanumeric characters for the user name.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete char-

acters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to

page 68.

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

ON JUN

OFF

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

ON JUN

OFF

CANCEL

8User Password

x Move the cursor to enter the ON or OFF time (year,

month, date) for summer time using the arrows button

(CDAB).

Enter 4-8 alphanumeric characters for the password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete char-

acters as for attaching text information to images. Refer to

page 68.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected cell for entry of the ON

or OFF time for summer time.

Important:

Set a unique password, not something that would be

easily guessed by a third person. The password also

should be memorable.

Recording

Event

Schedule

1^System

SETUP MENU

Advanced

ON JUN

LIVE

OFF

Switcher

Display

Comm

Maintenance

Basic Setup

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

ON JUN

Time Format

OFF

Time

Date

JAN

10 10 10

SET

User Regist.

User Edit

OFF

8Level

ON JUN

10 :00

Auto Adjust Time

OFF

MASTER Time

AUTO

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

ON -- --

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

OFF

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions in each level is described in

"User Level" (Refer to page 109).

LV1/LV2/LV3

ON JUN

OFF

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

ON JUN

OFF

CANCEL

c Rotate the jog dial to enter the ON or OFF time (year,

8Priority

month, date) for summer time.

Assign priority (1 (highest) to 16 (lowest)) to users.

v Move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button.

→ The ON and OFF time for summer time will be

applied and the "Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Table" will be closed.

8Default Screen

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login

procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected camera

channel.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from camera channels 1 - 4

on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from camera channels 5 - 8

on a 4-split screen.

Notes:

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4

and press the SET button, the setting will be can-

celed and the "Summer Time (Day Light Savings)

Table" will be closed.

107

QUAD9 (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a 4-

split screen.

QUAD9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

7SCREEN: Displays images from camera channels 1 - 7 on

a 7-split screen.

ꢀ [User Delete] Deletion of a registered user

It is possible to delete a registered user.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial to

select the user name. Move the cursor to "DELETE" and

press the SET button.

The selected user will be deleted.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

User Name

9SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays

images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays

images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

Time

Date

DELETE

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

10SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

16SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

SEQ: Images will be displayed in the sequential display.

ꢀ [Host Regist.] Registration of PC (host)

accessible to this unit

via a network such as a LAN.

Move the cursor to "SET" at the lower right on the menu and

press the SET button to complete registration.

8Camera Partitioning

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Select a controllable range for each camera channel from

the following.

View/Operate: Displaying live images and operating the

camera are possible.

View: Displaying live images is possible but cameras can-

not be operated.

--: Both displaying live images and operating the camera

are impossible.

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

Basic Setup

000

LV1

000

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View/Operate

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

View/Operate CAM10 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM11 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM12 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM13 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM14 View/Operate

View/Operate CAM15 View/Operate

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

View/Operate

CAM16

View/Operate

SET

8Host IP Address

Enter the IP address. Move the cursor to "Host IP Address"

and rotate the jog dial to enter the IP address. For this unit,

enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-254).

ꢀ [User Edit] Correction of the registered user

information

It is possible to edit the registered user information.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial to

select the user name.

The registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way as registration.

(Refer to page 107.)

Notes:

• Entering "*" validates all numbers.

• It is impossible to register "0.0.0.0" or "*.*.*.*".

8Level

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete editing.

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions for each level is described in

"User Level" (Refer to page 109).

LV1/LV2/LV3

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

User Name

Basic Setup

Time

Date

User Password

User Regist.

User Edit

8Priority

LV1

16 SCREEN

Level

Priority

Default Screen

I Camera Partitioning

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Assign priority (1 (highest) to 16 (lowest)) to hosts.

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

CAM9

View

View/Operate CAM10

View/Operate CAM11

View/Operate CAM12

View/Operate CAM13

View/Operate CAM14

View/Operate CAM15

View/Operate CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

8Default Screen

EDIT

Select a startup display to be displayed after login from the

following.

CAM1 - 16 (for the WJ-HD316A)/CAM 1 - 9 (for the WJ-

HD 309A): Displays live images from the selected cam-

era channel on a single screen.

108

QUAD1 - 4: Displays live images from camera channels 1 -

4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays live images from camera channels 5 -

8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a 4-

split screen.

ꢀ [Host Delete] Deletion of a registered host

It is possible to delete a registered host.

Move the cursor to "Host Delete" and rotate the jog dial to

select the host. Move the cursor to "DELETE" and press the

SET button.

The selected host will be deleted.

QUAD9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays live

images from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split

screen.

QUAD13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays live

images from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split

screen.

9SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9 (for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays

images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

16SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

SEQ: Images will be displayed in the sequential display.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

Host IP Address

0. 0. 0. 0

DELETE

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

ꢀ [User Level] Setting of the operation level

Set operable functions at each user level (LV 1/LV 2/

LV 3).

Rotate the jog dial to display "b" to enable operation.

Leave it blank to disable operation.

Refer to the table on the next page for each function.

The default settings are shown as below.

8Camera Partitioning

Select a controllable range for each camera channel from

the following.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

SChedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

View/Operate: Displaying live images and operating the

camera are possible.

View: Displaying live images is possible but cameras can-

not be operated.

--: Both displaying live images and operating camera are

impossible.

LV1 LV2 LV3

Time

Date

Setup

Setup Status

User Regist.

User Edit

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

Each parameter of the user level is as follows:

LV1: Possible to perform all the operations (Administrators)

LV2: Possible to refer the settings of the unit and the

access log, and to perform the alarm reset (Head of

operators)

ꢀ [Host Edit] Correction of the registered host

information

It is possible to edit the registered host information.

Move the cursor to "Host IP Address" and rotate the jog dial

to select the host IP address.

LV3: Possible to monitor or play the images (Operators)

The registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way as registration.

(Refer to page 108.)

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete editing.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

000

LV1

000

Basic Setup

Time

Date

16 SCREEN

User Regist.

User Edit

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

View/Operate

View/Operate CAM10

View/Operate

View/Operate CAM12

View/Operate CAM13

View/Operate CAM14

View/Operate CAM15

View/Operate CAM16

CAM9

View

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

CAM11

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

EDIT

109

ꢀ Functions that can be enabled/disabled

The following functions can be enabled/disabled according to the user level.

Function

Description

Setup

The SETUP MENU is displayed and the settings can be performed.

Only the SETUP MENU can be displayed. The settings cannot be performed.

The setting menu of the camera is displayed and the settings can be performed.

Setup Status

Camera Setup

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the event log. (Refer to page

137.) You also can refer to the network log. Refer to the Network Operating

Instructions (PDF) for further information.

Event Log Status

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the error log. (Refer to page

137.)

Error Log Status

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer to the access log. (Refer to page

138.)

Access Log Status

Alarm Reset

An event operation can be canceled. (Refer to page 51.)

An event operation can be suppressed. (Refer to page 51.)

A recorded image can be manually copied. (Refer to page 52.)

Image data in the normal recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Image data in the event recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Manual recording can be started and stopped.

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

A recorded image can be played.

This unit can be logged into from a PC via a network.

ꢀ [Save/Load] Saving and loading of settings

of the SETUP MENU

It is possible to save the settings of the SETUP MENU in

this unit.

It is also possible to call up saved settings. (Load)

Move the cursor to "SAVE" or "LOAD" and press the SET

button.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Basic Setup

User Setup Save

User Setup Load

SAVE

LOAD

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Quick Menu

110

I [Recording]

Perform the settings for the basic recording (REC Setup)

and the emergency recording.

8Manual Recording Channel

Select a camera channel for manual recording from the fol-

lowing. Refer to page 20 for manual recording.

MON2: Images from the camera channel currently dis-

played on monitor 2 will be recorded.

ALL: Images from all the camera channels will be record-

ed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Setup

REC Type

Recording

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Color Mode

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

QUICK

OFF

All

COLOR STD

Emergency REC

REC Priority

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Audio Allocation

Important:

Quick Menu

When operating on monitor 1 when "MON2" is selected

for "Manual Recording Channel" on the "REC Setup"

menu, all camera channels will be recorded by manual

recording instead of recording the camera channel dis-

played on monitor 2.

When "MON2" is selected, images from a camera chan-

nel for another manual recording that has started later

will be recorded regardless of the operation using the

buttons on the front panel or via a network.

ꢀ [REC Setup] Perform the settings for the

basic recording

Perform the following settings for the basic recording.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Setup

REC Type

Recording

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Color Mode

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

QUICK

OFF

All

COLOR STD

Emergency REC

8Color Mode

Select the color mode for recording from the following.

COLOR FINE: Record images in a high resolution color

COLOR STD: Record images in a standard resolution color

B/W: Record images in black and white

REC Priority

Manual REC

Event REC

Schedule REC

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

Audio Allocation

Quick Menu

Important:

Select "QUICK" or "ADVANCED" for validation of the record-

ing settings.

QUICK: The recording settings set on the SETUP MENU

(Quick) will be validated when recording.

When "B/W" is selected for the color mode, do not

select "SFA", "FQA", "NQA" or "EXA" for the image quali-

ty. Otherwise, it may cause deterioration of the image

quality.

ADVANCED: The recording settings set on the SETUP

MENU (Advanced) will be validated when recording.

8Embedded REC (Title)

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to record a

displayed camera title together as a part of the recorded

image.

ON: Record camera titles together as a part of the record-

ed image.

8Recording

Select ON or OFF to record or not record.

ON: Recording will be performed.

OFF: No recording will be performed.

OFF: Does not record camera titles.

Important:

When OFF is selected for this setting, no recording will

be performed. Select ON for normal use except when it

is necessary to stop recording forcibly such as when a

problem has occurred with the unit.

Note: In case that "ON" is selected for "Embedded REC

(Title)" and also "R-UPPER" or "R-LOWER" is selected for

the camera title position, when playing images record-

ed with the resolution setting of "SIF", a part of the

embedded camera title may not be displayed.

8Power ON Manual REC

8Embedded REC (Time & Date)

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to start

recording when the power is turned on by the connected

external timer (or the switch).

Select ON or OFF to determine whether or not to record the

displayed time and date together.

ON: Manual recording will start automatically after complet-

ing the system check.

ON: Record the time and date together as a part of the

recorded image.

OFF: Manual recording will not start automatically after

completing the system check.

OFF: Does not record the time and date.

Important:

When ON is selected, manual recording will start auto-

matically after completing the system check.

111

Important:

ꢀ [Emergency REC] Perform the settings for

• It is possible to select ON or OFF to determine whether

or not to display the camera title during playback even

though OFF is selected. (Refer to page 129.)

• When ON is selected, it is impossible to hide the cam-

era title and the time and date. (Refer to page 129.)

• When playing images recorded after selecting "ON" for

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)" (page 111), the

embedded abbreviation of the recording mode (event

recording/emergency recording) will be displayed.

The abbreviations are as follows:

EVT: Pre-/post-event recording

EMR: Emergency recording

The abbreviation display position differs depending on

the selected time and date display position for "Time &

Date Display Position" (page 129).

emergency recording

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as the

recording time or recording rate for emergency recording.

Refer to page 21 for further information about emergency

recording.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Setup

Resolution

Recording Time

Recording Rate and Quality

FIELD

10s

Emergency REC

RATE

3ips

Quality

RATE

3ips

Quality

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

SFA CAM9

SFA CAM10

SFA

CAM11

SFA

SFA CAM12

SFA CAM13

SFA CAM14

SFA CAM15

SFA CAM16

Auto Copy

OFF

Quick Menu

L-UPPER/R-UPPER: The abbreviation will be dis-

played below the time and date displayed at the

upper left/right of the screen.

L-LOWER/R-LOWER: The abbreviation will be dis-

played above the time and date displayed at the

lower left/right of the screen.

8Resolution

Select a recording resolution from the following.

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480), with camera

shake compensation

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 240)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

8REC Priority

Assigns priorities to recording modes. Assigns priorities 1

(highest) - 3 (lowest) to each recording mode. When two or

more recordings are performed in the same period, only a

recording with the highest priority will be performed.

Refer to page 20 for further information about each record-

ing mode.

Important:

• It is recommended to set the same value for the resolu-

tion of emergency recording as the resolution of manual

recording, event recording and schedule recording.

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

from the beginning of emergency recording when the

resolution is switched.

Important:

• Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

just after emergency recording has finished.

The priority of event recording will be applied for the

priority of pre-/post-event recording. When pre-/post-

event recording is to be performed, it is impossible to

perform manual recording/schedule recording.

8Recording Time

Perform the settings for the recording time and recording

action for emergency recording.

The following are available for the recording time.

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

8Audio Allocation

Allocates audio from the audio input connectors (1 - 4) on

the rear panel of the unit to camera channels.

Allocate audio in accordance with the channels of the con-

nected cameras. When OFF is selected, audio will not be

heard.

20 s/30 s

1 min - 10 min (in 1 minute intervals)

20 min/30 min/40 min/50 min/60 min

MANUAL: Recording will continue while the external switch

is being held down.

CONTINUE: Recording will not stop until the ALARM

RESET button on the front panel of the unit is pressed.

Important:

• When a live image from the audio assigned camera

channel is displayed on a single screen on monitor 2,

audio will be heard. When displaying on a multi-screen,

audio will not be heard.

• When images from the audio assigned camera channel

are displayed on a single screen, recorded audio will

be heard. When displaying on a multi-screen, recorded

audio will not be heard.

• Audio will be recorded regardless of whether you are

displaying on a single screen or a multi-screen.

• Audio will not be recorded during pre-event recording

that is performed in the HDD pre-recording area.

• Audio may be recorded fragmentary occasionally.

8Recording Rate and Quality

Perform the settings for the recording rate and image quali-

ty for emergency recording.

The following are available for the recording rate.

OFF/1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/

30 ips/60 ips

112

Important:

• When OFF is selected for a specified camera channel,

images from a camera channel set to OFF will not be

recorded.

• When "FRAME 3D ON" or "FRAME 3D OFF" is selected,

the total recording rates of CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for the

WJ-HD316A) must be less than 30 ips.

• When "FIELD" is selected, the total recording rates of

CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for the WJ-HD316A) must be less

than 60 ips.

• When "SIF" is selected, the total recording rates of CAM

1 - CAM 16 (for the WJ-HD316A) must be less than

120 ips.

• When "FRAME 3D ON", "FRAME 3D OFF" or "SIF" is

selected, it is impossible to select 60 ips.

• When the total of the recording rates of camera chan-

nels 1 - 16 is set to the maximum (60 ips when FIELD is

selected, 120 ips when SIF is selected), the recording

rate of two of the camera channels to which the lowest

and the second lowest recording rates are set will be

lower than the set recording rate. (When the lowest

recording rate is applied to three of the camera chan-

nels, this may happen to two of the three channels.)

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

Important:

When "B/W" is selected for the color mode, do not

select "SFA", "FQA", "NQA" or "EXA" for the image quali-

ty. Otherwise, the image quality may become poor.

8Auto Copy

Select ON or OFF to set whether or not to automatically

copy images recorded by emergency recording onto the

copy area on the built-in hard disk or DVD-RAM disk.

Important:

When OFF is selected for "Auto Copy" on "Basic setup"

of "System", the auto copy function will not work after

emergency recording even though ON is selected for

this setting. Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for

"Auto Copy".

113

I [Event] Function for Events

Perform the settings for event actions of each event type

(motion detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal

alarm).

The following are available for the buzzer sound duration.

When OFF is selected, a buzzer will not sound.

(s: second, m: minute)

OFF: The buzzer will not sound.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

EXT: The buzzer will continue until the ALARM RESET but-

ton is pressed.

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

SETUP

Video Loss

Terminal/Command Alarm

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Quick Menu

ꢀ [VMD Setup] Perform the settings for the

motion detection function

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or dis-

able the motion detection function for each camera chan-

nel.

ꢀ [Event Setup] Settings for the alarm output

duration and the buzzer duration

Perform the settings for the alarm output duration and the

buzzer sound duration for each event type (motion detec-

tion, video loss, terminal/command alarm).

When ON is selected, perform the settings for the motion

detection area for each camera channel. Up to 4 areas can

be set for a camera channel for the detection area. Refer to

page 114 for further information about the motion detection

function.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

SETUP

Video Loss

Terminal/Command Alarm

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Event Setup

VMD Setup

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

OFF

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Quick Menu

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Maintenance

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

SETUP

Video Loss Setup

Terminal/Command Alarm Setup

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Alarm Output

Buzzer

1 0 s

O K

CANCEL

Quick Menu

The following are available for the alarm output duration.

When OFF is selected, the alarm output will not be sup-

plied.

[Screenshot 1]

(s: second, m: minute)

Start operation from the camera channel selection menu of

the "VMD Setup" window.

OFF: No alarm output is supplied.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/

3 min/4 min/5 min

EXT: Alarm output will continue until the ALARM RESET

button is pressed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Event Setup

VMD Setup

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

OFF

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Important:

The alarm output duration cannot be set for video loss.

Signals will be supplied continuously from the camera

error output terminal (pin no. 17) of the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear panel during the period

when the video signal is lost. (Refer to page 86.)

Quick Menu

z Rotate the jog dial to select ON for a desired camera

channel for which the motion detection function is to be

applied, and press the SET button.

114

[Screenshot 2]

The "VMD Setup" window will be displayed.

ꢀ Delete the motion detection area

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

x Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the start point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button (CDAB), and press the SET button.

Note: To set all areas on the monitor as the motion

detection area, select "ALL AREAS" and press the

SET button.

z Rotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA" on the sta-

tus bar.

Note: After selecting "DELETE ALL AREAS", pressing

the SET button will delete all of the motion detection

areas.

[Screenshot 3]

The start point of the motion detection area is assigned.

[Screenshot 2]

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" win-

dow.

c Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the end point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button (CDAB), and press the SET button.

x Move the cross cursor onto an area to be deleted using

the arrows button (C D A B), and press the SET but-

ton.

[Screenshot 4]

The motion detection area is set with the start point and the

end point as the points at opposite angles of the motion

detection area.

c To complete the settings, press the SET button after

selecting "EXIT" on the status bar by rotating the jog

dial.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

8Set the sensitivity

Set the sensitivity for the created motion detection area.

Sensitivity can be set for each area.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

v Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set another motion detection

area.

Up to 4 areas can be set. The newly created areas will

be named automatically as A, B, C and D in the order of

creation.

b To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

z Press the SET button after selecting "SENSITIVITY" by

rotating the jog dial.

115

Note:

• Depending on the set positions of the motion detection

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

areas, the sensitivity indications of the detection areas

may be displayed overlapping each other.

• Depending on the set position of the detection area, a

part of the sensitivity indication of the detection area

may not be displayed.

[Screenshot 2]

The sensitivity of the selected detection area will be dis-

played.

z Press the SET button after selecting "VMD MODE" by

rotating the jog dial.

[Screenshot 2]

The detection mode menu will be displayed.

x Move the cross cursor to select an area using the

arrows button (CDA B).

c Select the sensitivity for the selected area by rotating

the jog dial from the following.

OFF: No motion will be detected in this area.

LOW: Low sensitivity

x Set the detection mode.

MID: Standard sensitivity

HIGH: High sensitivity

Move the cursor to the desired detection mode using

the arrows button (CDAB).

Move the cursor on the desired detection mode using

the arrows button (A B) and check the radio button

next to the selected mode using the jog dial.

Refer to the following for further information about each

of the detection modes.

Note: When a motion is detected with the selected sen-

sitivity, the motion detection area where the motion

was detected will turn red and the buzzer will start

sounding.

v Set the sensitivity for all the detection areas by repeat-

ing steps 2 and 3.

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion

detection areas.

b To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR

using the arrows button (CDAB) and select an area

using jog dial. Move the cursor to the parameter box of

the selected area using the arrows button (A B), and

then rotate the jog dial to select an interval time for an

object moving between each area from the following.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

8Set the detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of

detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of

detection in a detection area is available by setting the

detection mode.

Move the cursor to the parameter box of each area

using the arrows button (C D A B) and select a mov-

ing duration for an object in each area from the follow-

ing using the jog dial.

0 s/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min

c After completing the settings, press the SETUP/ESC

button.

116

<DURATION (to detect objects that keep moving in the

area)>

v Rotate the jog dial to select "EXIT" on the status bar,

and press the SET button.

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an object keeps moving for the set period in

the detection area. For example, in case of the following

settings; 10 sec. for the areas A and B, 20 sec. for area

C and 30 sec. for area D:

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

8About the Detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of

detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a

method of detection in a detection area is available by

setting the detection mode.

An event action will be performed when an object

keeps moving for 10 seconds in area A or B, or for 20

seconds in area C, or for 30 seconds in area D.

There are three detection modes as follows.

Important:

10 s

Activating two or more detection modes simultaneously

is not possible.

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion

detection areas.

20 s

30 s

ꢀ [Alarm Setup] Perform the settings for the

alarm auto reset and alarm disarm

Perform the settings for the alarm display duration. The

alarm display will automatically disappear when the display

duration has passed. (Alarm Auto Reset)

Perform the settings to suspend the set duration when the

same type of event (motion detection, video loss, terminal

alarm, command alarm) has occurred sequentially so that

the event action will not be performed each time. (Alarm

Disarm)

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D

areas.

<VECTOR (to detect object moving to a certain direc-

tion)>

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an object moves within the set time to the

other detection area in the set order.

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Auto Reset

Alarm Disarm Time

OFF

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

10 s

Quick Menu

8 Alarm Auto Reset

The following are possible for the alarm auto reset.

When OFF is selected, the alarm display will not automati-

cally disappear.

10 s

To erase the alarm display, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

OFF/1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

The following is an example.

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after

being detected in area A.

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after

being detected in area B.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after

being detected in area C.

8Alarm Disarm Time

The following are possible for the alarm disarm.

2 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

When all of the above have occurred, an event action

will be performed.

117

ꢀ [Terminal Setup] Perform the settings for

the alarm terminal polarity.

Select how to supply the signal to the alarm terminal.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Terminal Setup

N.O.

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Quick Menu

N.O.: Signals will be supplied when short-circuited.

(Normally Open)

N.C.: Signals will be supplied when open-circuited.

(Normally Closed)

Note: It is possible to set polarities for each of the alarm

inputs 1-16 respectively using a PC via a network.

118

I [Schedule] Settings for the recording/event action schedule

Perform the settings for the recording schedules of record-

ing and event action by designating a day of the week and

time.

Important:

• In the following cases, recording will not be performed

for around 4 seconds:

A day can be divided into up to 6 time zones, and record-

ing programs and event action programs can be assigned

to each time zone to create a recording schedule.

Up to 4 normal recording programs (REC Program) and up

to 4 event action programs (Event Program) can be creat-

ed. Perform the settings for the REC Program: resolution

and recording rate. Perform the settings for the Event

Program: action mode for each event type and auto copy.

It is possible to create special days apart from the normal

schedule, and a recording program of another day of the

week can be switched to a special day’s program automati-

cally.

• When resolution is switched such as when a differ-

ent resolution is set depending on different time

zones

• When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing

the settings

8Recording Rate and Image Quality for Each

Camera Channel

Perform the settings for recording rate, image quality and

recording duration for each camera channel (The settings

for recording duration can be performed only for pre-event

recording and post-event recording.).

OFF/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/0.5 ips/1 ips/2 ips/

3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

Flowchart on how to create a schedule

Follow the procedures below to create schedules.

Important:

• When the total of the recording rate of camera channels

1 - 16 is set to the maximum (60 ips when FIELD is

selected, 120 ips when SIF is selected), the recording

rate of two of the camera channels to which the lowest

and the second lowest recording rates are set will be

lower than the set recording rate. (When the lowest

recording rate is applied to three of the camera chan-

nels, this may happen to two of the three channels.)

• The maximum rate for each camera channel differs

depending on the resolution as follows.

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF: 30 ips

FIELD: 60 ips

Create REC Program/Event Program.

(aPage 119 and 120)

Create a timetable. (aPage 121)

Assign REC Program/Event Program to a timetable.

(aPage 121)

ꢀ [REC Program] Create a recording program

SIF: 30 ips

Perform the settings of resolution, and the settings of

recording rate and image quality for each camera channel.

Up to 4 recording programs can be created.

• The total of the recording rates of camera channels

must be as follows.

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF: 30 ips or less

FIELD: 60 ips or less

Recording Program 1

SETUP MENU

System

Shedule

SIF: 120 ips or less

Resolution

^RecordingFIELD^Event

Display Comm

LIVE

12AM

Advanced

Switcher

Maintenance

60 ips

48 ips_6PM

POST EVENT

TIME RATE QUALITY TIME

Recording Table

Total REC Rate

12AM

SCHEDULE

6AM

12PM

PRE EVENT

Time Table

MANUAL

MON

RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY

REC Program

CAM1

OFF

1ips

30s

3ips

FQB

10s

FQB

TUE

When the total recording rate becomes more than the

above values, the sections displaying the maximum record-

ing rates for each camera channel will turn red, and it will

be impossible to close the recording program window. In

this case, lower the recording rate that has turned red to a

value less than the above values.

CAM2

CAM3

FQB

10s 1ips

Event Program

FQB

WED

Special DCaA

Ms4

FQB

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

FQB

THU

FQB

FRI

FQB

SAT

FQB

SUN

FQB

EVERY

FQB

EXT.

FQB

Quick Menu

^EVTO K ^P1

CANCEL

REC

8Resolution

The following are available for the image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480) with the motion

blur compensation

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 240)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

Note: When "FRAME 3D ON" is selected, it is possible to

record a moving object with less blurring. However,

fuzzy images may sometimes be displayed.

The following are available for the recording duration (only

for event pre-recording and event post-recording).

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s/1 - 10 min (in 1 minute intervals)

20 - 60 min (in 10 minutes intervals)

119

MAN. (MANUAL): The recording duration will be as follows

depending on the event type.

• At a motion detection: For 8 seconds

• At a video loss occurrence: During a video loss occur-

rence

• At a terminal alarm occurrence: During the supply of a

signal

• At a command alarm: For 8 seconds

CON. (CONTINUE): Recording will be performed continu-

ously until the ALARM RESET button is pressed.

• When the recording rate is low, images may be record-

ed for a longer duration than the set pre-event record-

ing duration.

• Pre-event recording will not be performed for a camera

channel whose post-event recording rate is OFF.

• Audio will be recorded up to for 16 seconds before the

event occurrence. However, audio will not be recorded

during pre-event recording that is being performed in

the HDD pre-recording area.

• In case that the pre-event recording is to be performed,

when two or more events occur continuously in a

moment, the start time of the post-event recording of

the second event and later will be delayed respectively.

(The actual time and date of the event occurrences will

be recorded on the event log.) In this case, the start

time of the pre-event recording will be delayed auto-

matically.

When performing the pre-event recording in an environ-

ment where two or more events may occur at short

times frequently, it is recommended to set the pre-

recording duration longer.

Notes:

• When "MAN." is selected for the recording duration,

recording will be performed for 8 seconds at least at an

event occurrence as long as the alarm is not canceled.

• Available recording duration for pre-event recording will

differ depending on the settings of "Resolution" and

"Recording Rate and Quality" for pre-event recording as

below:

Recording

rate

FRAME 3D ON FIELD

FRAME 3D OFF

SIF

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

5 min

2 min

1 min

30 s

10 s

7 s

10 min

5 min

3 min

2 min

1 min

30 s

20 s

10 s

9 s

20 min

10 min

6 min

5 min

4 min

2 min

1 min

30 s

20 s

10 s

9 s

Important:

Pre-event recording image only just recorded will be delet-

ed in the following cases:

• When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the

settings

• When post-event recording is newly performed

• When the time zone of a schedule switched and record-

ing had just started

• When the date has been changed

6 s

7.5

4 s

ꢀ [Event Program] Create event programs for

3 s

7 s

an event occurrence

2 s

4 s

Perform the settings of event action for each event type

(motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm) or

of auto copy.

1 s

2 s

4 s

1 s

• When a pre-recording area is created in an optional

extension unit (WJ-HDE300 series), it is possible to per-

form pre-event recording for up to 60 minutes accord-

ing to the resolution, recording rate and disk space for

pre-event recording. Refer to page 147 for descriptions

of how to create the pre-recording area.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Time Table

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Event Program 4

SETUP

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

• Pre-event recording for the camera channel that has the

pre-recording area in the extension unit will always be

performed on the pre-recording area.

Quick Menu

• When a value that is impossible to be applied is set for

the pre-event recording, the relevant value will turn red,

and it will be impossible to close the recording program

window. In this case, lower the recording rate that has

turned red.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

SETUP

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Event Action 4

Time Table

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Event Program 1

SETUP

VMD

Recording Program 1

I Video Loss

SETUP

Terminal/Command Alarm

Resolution

Recording Table

Total REC Rate

MANUAL

FIELD

60 ips

48 ips

POST EVENT

TIME RATE QUALITY

O K

CANCEL

SCHEDULE

PRE EVENT

RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY

TIME

30s

CAM1

OFF

1ips

3ips

FQB

10s

FQB

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

10s 1ips

Quick Menu

O K

CANCEL

120

8VMD

8Terminal/Command alarm

Perform the settings of event action at a motion detection or

the settings of the auto copy function.

Perform the settings of an event action at a terminal/com-

mand alarm occurrence or the settings of the auto copy

function.

The contents to be set are the same as the settings for

"VMD" above.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

SETUP

Time Table

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Event Program 4

VMD

Operation Mode

Auto Copy

ALARM

OFF

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

SETUP

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Time Table

CANCEL

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

TermEvineanlt/CPoromgmraamnd4Alarm

Operation Mode

Auto Copy

ALARM

OFF

Quick Menu

CANCEL

Perform the settings for the following operation mode. Refer

to page 49 for further information about each operation

mode.

Quick Menu

ACT DET (Activity Detection Mode): Performs only

recording, writing an event log and camera movement

to a preset position at an event occurrence. Other event

actions will not be performed.

ALARM (Alarm Mode): Performs every event action

according to the settings.

ꢀ [Time Table] Assignment of REC Program

and Event Program after setting the time

zone

Create recording timetables for each day of the week, and

assign REC Program and Event Program to each timetable.

Up to 6 recording programs can be created.

OFF: Performs only recording of the event log. Other event

actions will not be performed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

12AM

Switcher

Maintenance

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

Time Table

Auto copy is the function to copy recorded images auto-

matically onto the copy area of the hard disk or the DVD-

RAM disk.

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

SAT

Select ON or OFF to enable or disable the auto copy func-

tion.

ON: Enable the auto copy function

OFF: Disable the auto copy function

SUN

DAILY

EXT

Quick Menu

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

Do the following to create timetables.

Important:

• When "OFF" is selected for "Auto Copy" of "Basic Setup"

on "System", the auto copy function will not work even

though "ON" is selected for this setting.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation after displaying the timetable window.

Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for "Auto Copy".

• Images recorded (by pre-event recording) in the pre-

recording area in the extension unit will not be copied

automatically.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

12AM

Switcher

Maintenance

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

Time Table

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

SAT

8Video Loss

SUN

DAILY

EXT

Perform the settings of an event action at a video loss or the

settings of the auto copy function.

Quick Menu

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

The contents to be set are the same as the settings for

"VMD" above.

z Press the SET button.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Time Table

Event Program 1

Event Program 2

Event Program 3

Event Program 4

SETUP

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Video Loss

Operation Mode

Auto Copy

ALARM

OFF

CANCEL

Quick Menu

121

[Screenshot 2]

n Select OK using the arrows button (C D A B), and

The pop-up setting menu of the timetable for every day of

the week will be displayed.

press the SET button.

The cursor will be displayed and will move to "MON"

(Monday).

Notes:

• The start time and end time can be set in 15 min-

utes intervals.

• To copy a timetable that is set for a different day of

the week, select "Copy the Other Time Table" and

select a day of the week by rotating the jog dial in

step 3.

Then, move the cursor to the "day of the week" box,

press the arrows button (B) and select a day of the

week by rotating the jog dial. After selecting, move

the cursor to OK and press the SET button.

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 6

and press the SET button, the setting will be can-

celed and the pop-up settings menu of the

timetable for the selected day of the week will close.

System

Recording

Event

12PM

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

12AM

6AM

6PM

Switcher

Display

Comm

Maintenance

REC

EVT

MON

Time Table

REC

EVT

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

CANCEL

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

Quick Menu

x Select a day of the week using the arrows button (CD)

and press the SET button.

Note: When a signal is supplied from the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear panel the external

recording mode changeover terminal (pin no. 24) of

the unit will work with the set timetable for "EXT."

[Screenshot 5]

The settings are applied to the selected timetable and the

timetable for all the days of the week will be displayed.

[Screenshot 3]

The pop-up settings menu of the timetable for the selected

day of the week will be displayed.

System

Recording

Event

12PM

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

12AM

6AM

6PM

Switcher

Display

Comm

Maintenance

REC

EVT

MON

Time Table

REC

EVT

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

REC

EVT

System

Time Table (MON)

Copy the Other Time Table

New Time Table Setup

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

REC

EVT

Switcher

SAT

SUN

DAILY

EXT

TUE^Maintenance

REC

EVT

Time Table

Period 1

Period 2

Period 3

Period 4

Period 5

Period 6

REC

EVT

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

REC

EVT

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

CANCEL

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

Quick Menu

O K

CANCEL

m Move the cursor to the time zone of the day of the week

to which the REC program is to be assigned using the

arrows button (CDAB).

Quick Menu

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

c Select "New Time Table Setup" using the arrows button

(CD) and rotate the jog dial to check the radio button.

, Rotate the jog dial to select a desired REC program/

Event program.

[Screenshot 4]

The radio button for "New Time Table Setup" is checked.

(Rotating the jog dial changes the displayed REC pro-

gram.)

REC program will be displayed with different colors.

Yellow: REC program 1/Event program 1

Green: REC program 2/Event program 2

Pale purple: REC program 3/Event program 3

Indigo blue: REC program 4/Event program 4

System

Time Table (MON)

Copy the Other Time Table

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

TUE^Maintenance

Switcher

New Time Table Setup

Time Table

Period 1

Period 2

Period 3

Period 4

Period 5

Period 6

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

O K

CANCEL

It is possible to display the assigned REC Program/

Event Program window (pages 119 and 120) by press-

ing the SET button.

Quick Menu

REC PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4 EVT

PROG1 PROG2 PROG3 PROG4

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to assign REC program to other

timetables.

v Move the cursor to the start time input box for "Period 1"

using the arrows button (CDAB).

. Move the cursor to OK using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

b Rotate the jog dial to set the start time.

The end time can be set in the same way.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set for "Period 2" - "Period 6".

(It is not necessary to set for all of "Period 1" - "Period

6".)

→ The REC program/Event program will be assigned

to the selected time zone and the selected

timetable window will be closed.

122

Note: When the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 9, the settings will be

canceled and the selected timetable window will be

closed.

ꢀ [Special Days] Perform the settings for

recording programs for special days

Assign timetables to special days aside from other days of

the week. Timetables for special days can be set for up to

30 days.

Perform the settings to specify dates as special days and

apply the recording schedule to the special days.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Time Table

DATE

MODE

SUN 16 --

DATE

MODE

REC Program

Event Program

Special Days

Quick Menu

123

I [Switcher] Settings for the switcher function

Perform the settings for image switching such as the

sequential display setting or the waiting screen (while log-

ging out) setting for displaying on monitors 1 and 2.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Live Sequence" pop-up menu will be displayed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

Monitor

I Live Sequence

SETUP MENU

Advanced

SETUP

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

LIVE

Sequence Timing

₁I

₂I

₃I

₄I

INT

Switcher

Maintenance

Auto Skip

OFF

CAM1

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Secret View

SETUP

Secret View

OFF

INT

CAM1

OFF

CANCEL

Quick Menu

x Move the cursor to "CAM" of "STEP 1" using the arrows

button (CDAB).

ꢀ [Monitor 1] Switcher function of monitor 1

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor 1.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM".

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Secret View

SETUP

INT

Monitor

Live Sequence

SETUP

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

CAM1

Sequence Timing

₁I

₂I

₃I

₄I

INT

Auto Skip

OFF

CAM1

Secret View

OFF

CANCEL

Quick Menu

8Live Sequence

c Select how to display images from camera channels in

"STEP 1" from the following by rotating the jog dial.

1, 2, ... , 16: Displays an image from the selected cam-

era channel on a single screen.

Perform the settings for the sequential display of live

images as follows.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Monitor1" menu of "Switcher" on

the SETUP MENU.

1 - 4: Displays images from camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

5 - 8: Displays images from camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

9 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a

4-split screen.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

Secret View

SETUP

INT

CAM1

OFF

9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

1 - 9: Displays images from camera channels 1 - 9 on a

9-split screen.

10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split screen.

--: Skips the selected step.

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Live Sequence" using the arrows

button (CD) and press the SET button.

v When displaying images from camera channels "1 - 16"

on a single screen is selected in step 3, select the cam-

era position.

Move the cursor to "PRESET" in "STEP 1" using the

arrows button (CDAB).

124

[Screenshot 4]

The cursor moves to the "PRESET" in "STEP 1".

8Auto Skip

Select ON of OFF to determine whether or not to skip the

camera channel without supplying the video input signal

because it is not connected, etc.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Monitor

ON: Skips a channel if it is not connected.

OFF: Displays a black screen for a channel not connected.

Live Sequence

STIEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWSE

LLUP

Sequence Timing

1-8

9-16

-- INT2s

Auto Skip

OFF

CAM1

Secret View

OFF

1-4

5-8

9-12

5-8

9-12

13-16

8Login Screen

16 13-16

CANCEL

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login

procedure from the following.

Quick Menu

CAM1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected camera

channel.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from camera channels 1 - 4

on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from camera channels 5 - 8

on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 9 on the upper left area on a 4-

split screen.

QUAD9 - 12 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

7SCREEN: Displays images from camera channels 1 - 7 on

a 7-split screen.

b Rotate the jog dial to select a preset position number

for which image is displayed in "STEP 1" from the follow-

ing.

1 - 256: Moves to the selected preset number.

--: Does not move to the preset position.

n Select "DWELL" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button (C

DAB).

[Screenshot 5]

The cursor moves to"DWELL" in "STEP 1".

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Monitor

Live Sequence

STIEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWSE

LLUP

9SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD309A): Displays an image

from camera channel 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays

images from channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 - 16 (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays

images from camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-split

screen.

Sequence Timing

1-8

9-16

-- INT2s

Auto Skip

OFF

CAM1

Secret View

OFF

1-4

5-8

9-12

5-8

9-12

13-16

16 13-16

CANCEL

Quick Menu

10SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

16SCREEN (only for the WJ-HD316A): Displays images

from camera channels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

--: No camera image will be displayed (black screen)

m Rotate the jog dial to select an interval time to go to the

next sequential step from 1 - 30 seconds (in 1 second

intervals).

The sequence step is skipped when "0 s" is selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 7 to set for the other sequence

steps.

, Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D

AB), and press the SET button.

8Secret View

The secret view is a function to display a black screen on

monitor 1 when camera images are displayed with a single

screen on monitor 2. Select ON or OFF to determine

whether to enable or disable the secret view function.

ON: Enables the secret view function. (Camera images dis-

played with a single screen on monitor 2 will be dis-

played while monitor 1 has a black screen.)

→ The settings for the sequential display are set and

the sequence setting menu closes.

Note: If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 8 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the sequence setting menu will be closed.

OFF: Disables the secret view function.

8Sequence Timing

Select an image switching method from the following.

INT: Switches images according to the settings for "Live

sequence" of "Switcher".

EXT: Switches images when receiving a signal from an

external device.

MON 2: Match with the image switching timing of the live

sequence on monitor 2.

125

ꢀ [Monitor 2] Switcher function of monitor 2

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor 2.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Monitor

Live Sequence

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

SETUP

INT

CAM1

Quick Menu

8Live Sequence

The settings for "Live Sequence" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 124 for further information.

8Sequence Timing

Select an image switching method from the following.

INT: Switches images according to the settings for "Live

sequence" of "Switcher".

EXT: Switches images when receiving a signal from an

external device.

Notes:

• Select "EXT" when an external device that can transmit

a sequence signal is connected.

• The sequence changeover I/O (pin no.21) of the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel will

supply signals when "INT" is selected and will receive

signals when "EXT" is selected.

8Auto Skip

The settings for "Auto Skip" are the same as for "Monitor1".

Refer to page 125 for further information.

8Login Screen

The settings for "Login Screen" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page 125 for further information.

126

I [Display]

Perform the display settings for monitors 1 and 2 connected

to the unit.

[Screenshot 2]

The camera title pop-up window will be displayed.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OSD Setup

I Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Monitor

_CAMI₁

_CAMI₂

_CAMI₃

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Monitor

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

Quick Menu

x Move the cursor to "CAM1" using the arrows button (C

DAB).

ꢀ [OSD Setup]

Perform the On Screen Display settings for monitor 1 and

monitor 2 such as the settings of camera titles or the set-

tings of the time display position.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to "CAM1".

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OSD Setup _CAM1I

CAM1

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

_CAM2I

Monitor

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM2

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM3

Monitor

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

Quick Menu

c Select a character to be entered by rotating the jog dial.

8Camera Title

Up to 16 characters can be entered.

Perform the settings for the camera title. It is possible to

display a camera title on the monitor 1/monitor 2, and

record it as a part of the recorded image (page 111). Do

the following to set the camera title.

v Move the cursor to the right side of the entered charac-

ter using the arrows button.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the camera title.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "OSD Setup" menu.

Notes:

• To correct the entered characters, move the cursor

to the character to be corrected and press the

STOP button to delete it. Enter a correct character

after deleting.

• To copy the camera title that has been set for

another camera channel, follow the procedure

below.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

Monitor

1. Move the cursor to "CAM 1" in step 2 above and

press the SET button. The following screen will

be displayed.

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Camera Title" using the arrows but-

System

Recording

Event

Schedule

SETUP MENU

CAM2

Copy Another Camera Title

LIVE

ton (C D) and press the SET button.

Advanced

Switcher

CAM1

Display

Comm

Maintenance

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM2

SETUP

OSD Setup

I _CAM3

Camera Title

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM5

Monitor

CAM4

O K

CANCEL

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

Quick Menu

2. Select the camera channel for which the cam-

era title is to be copied by rotating the jog dial.

127

3. Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button

(C D A B), and press the SET button. The

camera title will be copied.

8Time & Date Display Position

Select a time and date display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper left of the screen.

R-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper right of the

screen.

L-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower left of the screen.

R-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower right of the

screen.

• The available characters for a camera title are dif-

ferent depending on the selected language as fol-

lows.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r

s t u v w x y z À Ä Â Æ Ç É Ì Ñ Ò Ö Ù Ü Ø ß à á â ä

å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï ñ ò ó ô ö ù ú û ü ø ? " # & ( ) * + ,

- . / : ; SP

Notes:

• When setting the time and date to be recorded together

with images, the time display will be recorded in the

selected position.

• Refer to page 111 for further information about

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)".

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U

V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Ä Å Ç É

Ñ Ö › Ü á à â ä ã å ç é è ê ë í ì î ï ñ ó ò ô ö õ ú ù

û ü ? " # & ( ) * + , - . / : ; SP

8Camera Title Display Position

Select a camera title display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays a camera title at the upper left of the

screen.

[Screenshot 4]

The camera title is entered.

R-UPPER: Displays a camera title at the upper right of the

screen.

L-LOWER: Displays a camera title at the lower left of the

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

screen.

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

OSD Setup

Camera Title

CAMT1ime &CDAaMte1 Display Position

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

R-LOWER: Displays a camera title at the lower right of the

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

CAM2

ENTRANCE

screen.

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CENTER: Displays a camera title at the center of the

screen.

CANCEL

Quick Menu

Notes:

• When setting the camera title to be recorded together

with images, the camera title display will be embedded

in the selected position.

• Refer to page 111 for further information about

"Embedded REC (title)".

System

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Maintenance

OSD Setup

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

CAMT9ime &CDAaMte9 Display Position

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

Line Color on the Multi Screen

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

8Line Color on the Multi Screen

CANCEL

Select a line color from the following.

WHITE: Displays white lines.

GRAY: Displays gray lines.

Quick Menu

BLACK: Displays black lines.

b Press the arrows button (CDAB) to move the cursor

to "OK" and press the SET button.

When the arrows button (C) is pressed while "OK" or

"CANCEL" is selected, the camera title pop-up window

for CAM9 - 16 will be displayed. Repeat steps 2 - 4 to

enter the camera title for CAM9 - 16.

ꢀ [Monitor 1] Settings on monitor 1 display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time, cam-

era title and alarm display on monitor 1.

Notes:

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

• If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 5 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the setting window of the camera title will be

closed.

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display

Camera Title Display

Alarm Display

Monitor

• It is possible to set "Camera Title [Display]" to dis-

play a camera title on monitor 2 and "Camera Title

[Embedded]" to embed/display a camera title on

monitor 1 individually using a PC via a network.

Refer to the Network Setup Instruction (PDF) for fur-

ther information.

Quick Menu

128

8Time & Date Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time.

ON: Displays time.

OFF: Does not function.

8Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the camera

title.

ON: Displays the camera title.

OFF: Does not function.

8Alarm Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the alarm dis-

play at an event occurrence.

ON: Displays the alarm display at an event occurrence.

OFF: Does not function.

ꢀ [Monitor2] Settings on monitor 2 display

Perform the display settings for monitor 2 such as the dis-

play mode (task bar style), time display position on/off,

camera title display position, etc.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Display Mode

T&D and Status Display Position

Camera Title Display

MODE

LOWER

OSD Setup

Monitor

Quick Menu

8Display Mode

Select a display mode (task bar style) from the following.

Refer to page 13 for further information about the task bar.

MODE 1: Select [MODE 1] for the display mode.

MODE 2: Select [MODE 2] for the display mode.

MODE 3: Select [MODE 3] for the display mode.

8T & D and Status Display Position

When selecting MODE 1, select the position of the time and

date display and the status from the following.

UPPER: Displays them in the upper part of the screen.

LOWER: Displays them in the lower part of the screen.

8Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the camera

title.

ON: Displays the camera title.

OFF: Does not function.

129

I [Comm] Settings for communication with other devices

It is necessary to adjust the communication speed and use

the same communication protocol with external devices

such as a controller when connecting those external

devices to the DATA port or the SERIAL connector

(RS232C).

It is also necessary to perform the settings for the network

such as the IP address and the gateway address when

operating this unit a PC via a network such as a LAN.

These are the descriptions of how to perform the required

settings for communication with external devices.

• To prevent operation mistakes, set the unused camera

channels to off.

It is possible to compensate for the video signal trans-

mission loss from the camera when using the VIDEO IN

connector 1 - 8. (cable compensation)

Perform the settings for the cable compensation

according to the length of cable used.

S: When the length of cable used is shorter than 500 m

M: When the length of cable used is longer than 500 m

and shorter than 900 m

L: When the length of cable used is longer than 900 m

and shorter than 1 200 m

ꢀ [Camera Control] Settings for the communi-

cation method and the cable compensation

for camera control

Select a communication method for each camera channel

to control cameras from the following.

Notes:

• Use 5C-2V cables for the cable compensation.

• Perform the settings for the cable compensation prop-

erly according to the cable length. Otherwise camera

pictures may not be displayed/recorded correctly.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Type of Camera Control

CAM

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

COMP

TYPE

COAX

CAM

TYPE

CAM9

ꢀ [PS.DATA Setup] Settings for the PS·Data

Perform the following settings for the PS·Data.

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

RS232C Setup

PSD

NW Setup

NTP Setup

RS485

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Quick Menu

Switcher

Maintenance

001

OFF

9600

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

RS232C Setup

NONE

NW Setup

COAX: Controls camera with the coaxial communication

(CAM 1 - 8 CH are available for the WJ-HD316A, CAM

1 - 6 CH are available for the WJ-HD309A)

OFF

NTP Setup

SETUP

Quick Menu

PSD: Controls camera with the PS·Data. (CAM 1 - 16 CH

are available for the WJ-HD316A, CAM 1 - 9 CH are

available for the WJ-HD309A)

8Unit Address (System)

RS485: Controls camera with the RS485 communication.

(CAM 1 - 16 CH are available for the WJ-HD316A, CAM

1 - 9 CH are available for the WJ-HD309A)

OFF: Does not control camera (CAM 1 - 16 CH are avail-

able)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigning to

PS·Data devices. The addresses must be unique to identify

system devices when connecting multiple devices compati-

ble with PS·Data. Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned

as the unit addresses to the system devices.

Notes:

• Perform settings according to the cameras connected

to this unit.

• CAM 9-16 control 4 cameras each (only for the WJ-

HD316A).

8Unit Address (Controller)

The unit address (controller) is used to control a PS·Data

device connected to this unit. Numbers, "001" - "099" are to

be assigned.

• When using the coaxial communication to control cam-

eras, connect cameras to the VIDEO IN connectors 1 -

8 for the WJ-HD316A (1 - 6 for the WJ-HD309A) (coaxi-

al communication compatible). When controlling cam-

eras connected to other VIDEO IN connectors with

coaxial communication, use a coaxial communication

unit (WJ-MP204). In this case, select "PSD" for the com-

munication method for the camera channels to be con-

trolled through the coaxial communication unit.

8Cascade

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the cascade con-

nection.

Set this to ON when connecting two or more units in the

cascade connection.

ON: Select this when connecting units in the cascade con-

nection.

OFF: Does not function.

130

[Screenshot 2]

8Baud Rate

The "Camera Number Setup" pop-up window will be dis-

played.

Select the communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Number Setup

_ContrI_ol

001

Camera

Unit Adress(System)

8Data Bit

Unit Adress(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

^SetupCAM PORT

CAM NO.

001

CAM PORT _OFC_FAM NO.

PS.DATA

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

009

010

9600

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

8 bit

002

003

004

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

^NONE011

NW Setup

012

OFF

013

Retry Timing

005

Alarm Data

NTP Setup

006

_S0_ET1_U4_P

015

016

Camera Number Setup

007

008

8Parity

O K

CANCEL

Quick Menu

Select a method to check a transmission error at communi-

cation from the following.

NONE: No parity check

EVEN: Even parity

ODD: Odd parity

x Move the cursor to a desired "CAM NO." of "CAM PORT"

using the arrows button (CDAB).

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected "CAM NO." of "CAM

PORT".

8Stop Bit

Select a stop bit from the following.

1 bit/2 bit

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

8Retry Timing

Camera Number Setup

_ContrI_ol

001

Camera

Unit Adress(System)

Unit Adress(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

^SetupCAM PORT

CAM NO.

001

CAM PORT _OFC_FAM NO.

PS.DATA

RS485 Setup

009

010

9600

Select a retransmission interval for when data reception is

not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

002

003

004

RS232C Setup

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

^NONE011

NW Setup

012

OFF

013

Retry Timing

005

Alarm Data

NTP Setup

006

_S0_ET1_U4_P

015

016

Camera Number Setup

007

008

O K

CANCEL

Quick Menu

8Alarm Data

Select a method to inform the connected controller of an

event occurrence from the following.

OFF: Does not function.

0 s: Informs the controller every time an event is detected.

1 s/5 s: Informs the controller when a specified time has

passed after detecting an event.

c Select a camera number by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign camera numbers to the

other CAM PORT.

v Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D

AB), and press the SET button.

8Camera Number Setup

→ Camera numbers will be assigned and the "Camera

Number Setup" menu will be closed.

It is possible to assign a number to each camera channel to

operate cameras using the controller compatible with

PS·Data.

Note: When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4

and press the SET button, the settings will be can-

celed and the "Camera Number Setup" menu will be

closed.

Do the following to assign numbers to the camera chan-

nels.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "PS·DATA Setup" menu.

ꢀ [RS485 Setup] Settings for RS485

Perform the following settings for RS485.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

001

OFF

9600

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

Camera Number Setup

RS232C Setup

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

NONE

LIVE

NW Setup

Switcher

Maintenance

OFF

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

19200

NTP Setup

SETUP

NONE

RS232C Setup

NW Setup

Quick Menu

NTP Setup

Quick Menu

z Move the cursor to "Camera Number Setup" using the

arrows button (C D) and press the SET button.

131

v Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D

AB), and press the SET button.

8Baud Rate

Select the communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

4 800/9 600/19 200 bps

→ Camera channels and ports to be controlled will be

assigned and the "Control Camera CH" menu will be

closed.

8Control Camera CH

Notes:

It is possible to assign camera channels to the RS485 ports

1 and 2 as shown below.

• When you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4

and press the SET button, the settings will be can-

celed and the "Control Camera CH" menu will be

closed.

• The unit number of the camera will be congruent

with the camera number.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "RS485 Setup" menu.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

19200

8Data Bit

SETUP

NONE

The data length for communication will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

RS232C Setup

NW Setup

NTP Setup

8Parity

Quick Menu

Methods to check a transmission error at communication

will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

z Move the cursor to "Control Camera CH" using the

arrows button (CD) and press the SET button.

8Stop Bit

[Screenshot 2]

The "Control Camera CH" pop-up window will be displayed.

Number of stop bit will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Control Camera CH

ꢀ [RS232C Setup] Settings for RS232C

Perform the following settings for RS232C.

_ConI_trol

19200

SETUP

PORT2

NONE

PORT2

Camera

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

CAMERA

TERM

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

TERM

Data Bit

CAM1

Parity

Stop Bit

CAM2

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

RS232C Setup

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

PORT1

NW Setup

PORT1

NTP Setup

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Address(System)

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

O K

CANCEL

001

9600

NONE

Quick Menu

RS232C Setup

OFF

Retry Timing

NW Setup

NTP Setup

x Move the cursor to a desired cell in the "TERM" column

using the arrows button (CDAB).

Quick Menu

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected cell in the "TERM" col-

umn.

8Unit Address(System)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigned to

each system device. The addresses must be unique to

identify system devices when connecting multiple system

devices.

Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned as the unit

addresses for the system devices.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Control Camera CH

_ConI_trol

19200

SETUP

PORT2

NONE

PORT2

Camera

Baud Rate

Control Camera CH

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

CAMERA

TERM

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

TERM

Data Bit

CAM1

Parity

Stop Bit

CAM2

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

RS232C Setup

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

PORT1

NW Setup

PORT1

NTP Setup

8Baud Rate

O K

CANCEL

Quick Menu

Select the communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

c Select a port by rotating the jog dial.

PORT1: Control through the RS485 port 1.

PORT2: Control through the RS485 port 2.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign other camera channels

to be controlled through the RS485 ports.

132

8Data Bit

8Host Authentication

Select a data length for communication from the following.

7/8 bit

Select ON or OFF whether or not to restrict access by IP

addresses at the time of access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, only PCs with registered IP address

can access this unit

8Parity

ON: Activates host authentication.

OFF: Does not function.

Select a method to check a transmission error at communi-

cation from the following.

NONE: No parity check

EVEN: Even parity

ODD: Odd parity

Note: When ON is selected for both the user authentication

and the host authentication, it is possible to operate the

unit only from a registered host. Operable functions will

differ depending on the user level setting of the authen-

ticated user. It is impossible to operate the unit from an

unregistered host.

8Stop Bit

Select a stop bit from the following.

1/2 bit

8Line Speed

8Retry Timing

The following are available for "Line Speed".

AUTO: Line speed will be applied automatically.

10-HALF: 10 Mbps half duplex

Select a retransmission interval for when data reception is

not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

10-FULL: 10 Mbps full duplex

100-HALF: 100 Mbps half duplex

100-FULL: 100 Mbps full duplex

ꢀ [NW Setup 1] Basic network settings

Perform the following basic network settings to operate this

unit using a PC via a network such as a LAN.

Note: When the SETUP MENU is closed after changing the

line speed, the unit will automatically restart.

8Live Video Quality

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

HTTP Port Number

User Authentication

Host Authentication

Line Speed

00080

OFF

AUTO

FQB

Image quality level for a live (FQB: high quality) will be dis-

played.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

Live Video Quality

RS232C Setup

NW Setup

NTP Setup

Quick Menu

ꢀ [NW Setup 2] Network connection settings

Perform the following network connection settings to oper-

ate this unit using a PC via a network such as a LAN.

8HTTP Port Number

Specify the HTTP port number to be used to transfer

images from this unit. It is not necessary to change it for

normal use.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

OFF

192

255

192

168

255

168

000

250

255

000

001

MANUAL

RS232C Setup

000

Primary

NW Setup

8User Authentication

000

Secondary

DDNS

OFF

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

Host Name

HD316

NTP Setup

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate user authenti-

cation at the time of access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, the user authentication (login) win-

dow will be displayed at the time of access from a PC.

The top page will be displayed if the entered user name

and password are registered.

10m

Domain Name

localdomain

Quick Menu

8DHCP

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the DHCP server.

When obtaining IP addresses, net mask and a gateway

address from the DHCP server, set to ON.

ON: Activates user authentication.

OFF: Does not function.

If not, set to OFF and enter those addresses manually.

ON: Uses the DHCP server.

OFF: Does not use the DHCP server.

Important:

It is recommended to select ON for the user authentica-

tion for security.

8IP Address

Enter an IP address when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

For this unit, enter 4 units from the decimal numbers (0-

254).

133

8Subnet Mask

8Time Adjustment

Enter a subnet mask according to the network configuration

when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

Select ON and OFF whether or not to adjust the time with

reference to the NTP server.

ON: Adjusts time with reference to the NTP server.

OFF: Does not function.

8Gateway

Enter the gateway address according to the network con-

figuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

Important:

• Time adjustment will be performed automatically when

the clock time is inaccurate to within 5 seconds from

the standard time of the NTP server.

• The clock will not be adjusted automatically during

event recording or emergency recording.

8DNS

Select "MANUAL" or "AUTO" to enable searching for an IP

address by its host name using DNS. When "OFF" is select-

ed for "DHCP" (no use of the DHCP server), select "MANU-

AL" and enter the domain name and the DNS server

address. If "ON" is selected for "DHCP" (use of the DHCP

server), select "AUTO". When DNS is not used, select "OFF".

When "MANUAL" is selected for DNS, enter the DNS server

address for "Primary" and "Secondary".

8Time Zone

Set the time zone in accordance with the place of use when

using the NTP server for time adjustment.

8NTP Server Address

8DDNS

Enter the NTP server address when using the NTP server

for time adjustment.

Select ON and OFF whether or not to use the DDNS

(Dynamic Domain Name System).

When "ON" is selected, perform the following.

User Name: Enter the user name registered in "DDNS".

User Password: Enter the password for the user entered in

"User Name".

8Refresh Interval

Select an interval of time inquiry to be transmitted to the

NTP server from the following.

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

Access Interval: Select an interval to update DNS from the

following.

Important:

10 min/30 min/1 h/6 h/24 h

Recording will not be performed for around 4 seconds

when changing the present time (accurate to within

seconds) using "Time Adjustment".

8Host Name

Enter the host address registered in DDNS.

Enter a host name of no more than 255 alphanumeric char-

acters. Hyphens (-) are also available for the host name.

8Domain Name

Enter the domain name of this unit.

Enter a domain name of no more than 255 alphanumeric

characters. Hyphens (-) are also available for the domain

name.

Note: The first character of the host name and the domain

name must be a letter (a - z). Do not begin with a num-

ber or a symbol character.

ꢀ [NTP Setup] Time adjustment of network

Perform the following settings for time adjustment.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

OFF

Time Adjustment

Time Zone

NTP Server Address

GGMMTT+-51:10:000

RS232C Setup

Refresh Interval

NW Setup

NTP Setup

Quick Menu

134

I [Maintenance] Functions for Maintaining

Perform the settings for the hard disk drives.

It is possible to check the histories (log) of event occur-

rence, error occurrence and access.

Notes:

• The displayed available disk space on this menu

will not include the space required for data man-

agement. Therefore, the understated available disk

space will be displayed.

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Comm

Maintenance

• When CONTINUE is selected for "Disk End Mode" of

"Maintenance", available disk space will be dis-

played as "--".

• "**" will be displayed to refer to a disk that is not

connected or a non-existent area on the disk.

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

Quick Menu

NORMAL

EXTENDED

8Warning for Disk Life Time (hour meter warning

setting)

Select the duration as the maximum active time of the hard

disk from the following. A warning will be displayed when

the set time have passed.

ꢀ [REC Rate] Check the recording rate and

the image quality for each camera channel.

10 000 h/20 000 h/30 000 h

The recording rate for each recording mode for each cam-

era (as shown below) will be displayed in list form.

8HDD Safety Mode

When maintaining (HDD replacement, installation, etc.)

without turning the power of the unit off, select ON for "HDD

Safety Mode". The unit will be restarted in the HDD Safety

Mode. Refer to page 69 for further information.

(The default setting is ON.)

SETUP MENU

Advanced

System

Recording

Display

Event

Schedule

LIVE

Switcher

Comm

Maintenance

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate

CAM

1ips

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

Quick Menu

NORMAL

EXTENDED

ꢀ [Version Info] Check the version information

Version information of the software and the hardware, and

the MAC address will be displayed.

MANU: Manual recording

SCHE: Schedule recording

PRE EVT: Pre-event recording

POST EVT: Post-event recording

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

EMR: Emergency recording

Software

Hardware (M)

(V)

V1.00

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Mac Address

AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF

ꢀ [Disk Info] Check the available hard disk

Event Log

Error Log

space

Access Log

Quick Menu

The available hard disk space of the following will be dis-

played: The built-in hard disk (normal recording area, event

recording area and copy area), optional extension unit

(EXT1 - 7), DVD-RAM, CD-R and DVD-R disk drive connect-

ed to the copy port (COPY1 or COPY2).

Refer to page 25 for more details on the built-in hard disk.

It is also possible to perform the settings for the hour-meter

(the active time of the HDD) warning and for the HDD safety

mode with this menu.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

Remaining

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT1

EXT2

EXT3

EXT4

EXT5

EXT6

EXT7

Normal REC Area

Event REC Area

Copy Area

1800GB

Disk Info

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

160GB

15000h

1200GB

1000GB

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

COPY 1 (Rear)

COPY 2 (Front)

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

3000h

OFF

135

Important:

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Disk End Mode", a

ꢀ [Disk End Mode] Set actions to be taken

when the available hard disk space has run

out

warning will not be issued.

Select an action from the following to be taken when the

available space of the built-in hard disk (normal recording

area, event recording area, copy area) or the external

recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R disk drive)

connected to the copy port (COPY1, COPY2) is running

out.

ꢀ [Data Delete] Delete image data on the hard

disk

Delete image data on the built-in hard disk (normal record-

ing area/event recording area).

Auto deletion and manual deletion are available to delete

image data.

It is also possible to initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk with

this menu.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

HDD

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

COPY1

COPY2

CONTINUE

STOP

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

STOP

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

REC Rate

Auto Delete

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

Delete before JAN 04

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Access Log

Quick Menu

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Disc Format of DVD

COPY1 (Rear)

COPY2 (Front)

FORMAT

Event Log

Error Log

CONTINUE: When the available disk space has run out, the

older data will be overwritten by the newer data. In this

case, the oldest data is the first to be overwritten.

STOP: When the available disk space has run out, record-

ing and copying will be canceled.

Access Log

Quick Menu

8Auto Delete

It is possible to delete recorded images automatically when

the set number of days has passed from the day the image

was recorded. Refer to a system administrator for further

information.

The number of days for the auto delete function is as fol-

lows.

Important:

When changing the setting from CONTINUE to STOP

during overwriting, the oldest 1 hour’s worth of record-

ed images will be deleted. It is impossible to recover

the deleted images even if it is set to CONTINUE again.

The auto delete function will not work when OFF is selected.

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/3DAYS/4DAYS/5DAYS/6DAYS/7DAYS/

8DAYS/9DAYS/10DAYS/14DAYS/30DAYS/45DAYS/

60DAYS/90DAYS/120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

Note: When copying on a CD-R or DVD-R disk, copying will

stop automatically when the available disk space has

run out even though CONTINUE is selected.

Note: Images recorded on the HDD copy area will not be

ꢀ [Disk Capacity] Set actions to be taken

when the available disk space is running

out

deleted.

8Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

By setting the time and date, images in the normal record-

ing area of the hard disk that were recorded up until a day

before the set time and date will be deleted.

Enter a 2-digit number for the year when entering the time

and date.

Select a level of the available disk space to issue a warning

when the available space of the built-in hard disk (normal

recording area, event recording area, copy area) or the

external recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R disk

drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1, COPY2) reach-

es a specified level.

8Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

The setting range is between 1 % and 10 % (in 1 % inter-

vals).

The warning will not be issued when OFF is selected.

By setting the time and date, images in the event recording

area of the hard disk that were recorded up until a day

before the set time and date will be deleted.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

8Disc Format of DVD

REC Rate

HDD Capacity Warning

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

COPY1 Capacity Warning

COPY2 Capacity Warning

OFF

Disk Info

Initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk in the DVD-RAM drive

connected to the copy port.

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

136

ꢀ [Event Log] Check the event log

ꢀ [Error Log] Check the error log

The event log (time and date at an event occurrence,

details) will be displayed in list form.

The error log will be displayed in list form.

Refer to page 49 for further information about each event.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

No.

Time&Date

Event

001 AUG.20.04 6:29:37 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

002 AUG.20.04 6:28:57 PM AL 1-0312312359

003 AUG.20.04 6:28:55 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

004 AUG.20.04 6:28:52 PM CAM LOSS1

005 AUG.20.04 6:28:44 PM PWR RECOVER

006 AUG.20.04 6:28:39 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

007 AUG.20.04 6:28:20 PM AL1-0312312359

008 AUG.20.04 6:28:17 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

009 AUG.20.04 6:28:15 PM CAM LOSS1

010 AUG.20.04 6:28:13 PM PWR RECOVER

011 AUG.20.04 6:28:12 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

012 AUG.20.04 6:28:10 PM AL1-0312312359

013 AUG.20.04 6:28:09 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

014 AUG.20.04 6:28:07 PM COM LOSS1

015 AUG.20.04 6:28:07 PM PWR RECOVER

016 AUG.20.04 6:28:05 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

017 AUG.20.04 6:27:58 PM AL1-0312312359

018 AUG.20.04 6:27:51 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

019 AUG.20.04 6:27:49 PM COM LOSS1

020 AUG.20.04 6:27:46 PM PWR RECOVER

Disk Info

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

LIVE

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

No.

Time&Date

Event

001 AUG.20.04 6:29:37 PM

002 AUG.20.04 6:28:57 PM

003 AUG.20.04 6:28:55 PM

004 AUG.20.04 6:28:52 PM

005 AUG.20.04 6:28:44 PM

006 AUG.20.04 6:28:39 PM

007 AUG.20.04 6:28:20 PM

008 AUG.20.04 6:28:17 PM

009 AUG.20.04 6:28:15 PM

010 AUG.20.04 6:28:13 PM

011 AUG.20.04 6:28:12 PM

012 AUG.20.04 6:28:10 PM

013 AUG.20.04 6:28:09 PM

014 AUG.20.04 6:28:07 PM

015 AUG.20.04 6:28:07 PM

016 AUG.20.04 6:28:05 PM

017 AUG.20.04 6:27:58 PM

018 AUG.20.04 6:27:51 PM

019 AUG.20.04 6:27:49 PM

020 AUG.20.04 6:27:46 PM

LOSS16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

COM-8

LOSS-16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

Disk Info

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

PREV/NEXT PAGE

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Quick Menu

COM-8

PREV/NEXT PAGE

Notes:

• Up to 100 error logs can be kept. When more than 100

error logs are filed, the older error logs will be overwrit-

ten by the newer error logs. In this case, the oldest log

is the first to be overwritten.

COM: Command alarm

EMR: Emergency recording

LOSS: Video loss

TRM: Terminal alarm

VMD: Motion detection

• When an error of the same type as the latest error

occurs, only the time and date of the latest error log will

be renewed.

Note: Up to 750 event logs can be kept. When more than

750 event logs are filed, the older event logs will be

overwritten by the newer event logs. In this case, the

oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

Indication

Description

Cause

AL*-YYMMDDhhmmss

Asterisk (*) indicates the camera channel Detects alteration

number

YYDDMMhhmmss indicates the played

time when the alteration was detected.

W-ERR X-Y

R-ERR X-Y

REMOVE X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that has

the hard disk error

Y indicates the disk number in the unit

(unit number)

Failed to write data on the HDD

Failed to read data on the HDD

Auto removal of the link

X indicates the unit/unit number that has

the hard disk error

Y indicates the disk number in the unit

(unit number)

X indicates the unit/unit number that has

the hard disk that has been removed

from the subject for recording.

Y indicates the disk number in the

unit/unit number

#-FULL

# indicates the partition name/external

recording device port number

No available disk space

THERMAL -X

FAN X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number in which Thermal error

the thermal error occurred

X indicates the unit/unit number

Y indicates the fan number (1-4)

Y will be left out if the malfunctioning fan

is in the extension unit

The fan is malfunctioning

#-nn%

# indicates the partition name of the hard Warning that the disk space is running

disk/external recording device

out

nn indicates the available disk space

137

Indication

Description

Cause

HDD SMART error

SMART X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that has

the hard disk error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

PWR LOSS

Detects a power outage

Hour-meter warning

H.METER X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that has

the hard disk error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

PROTECT -#

NO DISK -#

MEDIUM -#

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Disk has a write protection

Disk is not inserted

Incompatible disk

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

UNFORMATTED -#

W-ERR (MEDIUM-#)

PWR RECOVER

HDD-ERROR

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Unformatted disk

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Failed to write data on the disk (CD-R,

DVD-RAM and DVD-R)

Recover from a power outage

HDD error

M-FAIL MAIN-#

R-FAIL #

# indicates disk number

Mirroring recovery failure

RAID recovery failure

# indicates extension unit number

NO DATA-#

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Manual copy settings error (No image

in the designated time range)

NO DRIVE-#

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Copy drive is not connected

R-ERR (MEDIUM-#)

# indicates the port number to which the

external recording device is connected

Failed to read the medium of the copy

drive

**IN: The user name or the IP address displayed before IN

indicates the user/host logged in.

**OUT: The user name or the IP address displayed before

OUT indicates the user/host logged out.

ꢀ [Access Log] Check the access log

The time, user name and IP addresses when logging in/out

to/from this unit will be displayed in list form.

System

Recording

Display

Event

Comm

Schedule

SETUP MENU

Advanced

LIVE

**: A user name or host name will be displayed.

Switcher

Maintenance

REC Rate

No.

Time&Date

Event

192.168.100.100 IN

001 AUG. 5.04 2:28:25 PM

002 AUG. 3.04 10:05:26 AM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

Disk Info

003 JUL.29.04 3:18:39 PM

004 JUL.29.04 3:18:39 PM

005 JUL.29.04 3:00:42 PM

006 JUL.29.04 3:00:42 PM

007 JUL.29.04 2:59:08 PM

008 JUL.29.04 2:48:49 PM

009 JUL.29.04 1:57:24 PM

010 JUL.29.04 10:01:50 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

011 JUL.29.04 10:12:03 PM 192.168 100.100 IN

012 JUL.29.04 10:58:07 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

013 JUL.29.04 2:59:56 PM

014 JUL.29.04 7:01:30 PM

015 JUL.29.04 2:01:42 PM

016 JUL.29.04 1:58:44 PM

tshimi IN

tshimi OUT

123.123.123.123 OUT

192.168.100.100 IN

1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

tshimi IN

Version Info

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Notes:

• Up to 100 access logs can be kept. When more than

100 access logs are filed, the older access logs will be

overwritten by the newer access logs. In this case, the

oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

tshimi OUT

tshimi IN

tshimi OUT

123.123.123.123 OUT

192.168.100.100 IN

Event Log

Error Log

017 JUL.29.04 12:01:10 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

018 JUL.29.04 11:35:02 PM

019 JUL.29.04 7:22:16 PM

020 JUL.29.04 5:24:55 PM

tshimi IN

tshimi OUT

123.123.123.123 OUT

Access Log

Quick Menu

PREV/NEXT PAGE

138

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA

For operating the camera connected to this unit, it is necessary to set the camera functions in advance.

Setup of the camera functions can be performed on the setup menu of the connected camera.

You can operate the camera setup menu by calling up it from this unit. Contents of the camera setting menu and operations

vary according to the connected cameras. For further information, refer to the operating instructions of the camera.

The following are the descriptions of how to display the camera setting menu.

z Press the camera selection button for a desired camera channel and the SET button simultaneously.

→The camera setup menu will be displayed.

Use the following buttons on the front panel to perform the settings of the camera setup menu.

To move the cursor

Arrows button (CD)

To change the selected parameter

Arrows button (AB)

To determine the selected parameter

To display the submenu

SET button

To return to the previous menu

SETUP/ESC button

x Press any one of the PAN/TILT button, the ZOOM/FOCUS button, the IRIS button, the PRESET/AUTO button and the cam-

era selection buttons 4 - 16 for the WJ-HD316A (4 - 9 for the WJ-HD309A) to complete the camera setting.

Notes:

• To display the special menu of the camera setup menu, press the camera selection button 2 after moving the cursor to

SPECIAL on the camera setup menu.

• To reset the settings of the camera setup menu to the default settings, do the following:

1. Display the SPECIAL menu of the camera setup menu by pressing the camera selection button 2 after moving the

cursor to SPECIAL on the camera setup menu.

2. Press the camera selection button 3 after moving the cursor to CAMERA RESET on the camera setup menu.

3. Press any of the PAN/TILT, ZOOM/FOCUS, IRIS, PRESET/AUTO or the camera selection buttons 4 -16.

• To go back to the previously displayed window from the SPECIAL menu, press the SET/ESC button.

• Depending on the models of the connected cameras, the operation method and menu items are different. Refer to the

operating instructions of the connected camera.

139

DISK MANAGEMENT

I Notes on the hard disk

Camera images are recorded into the built-in hard disk of

I How to replace the built-in hard

disk

this unit.

It is possible to replace the hard disk drive regardless of

whether the power of the unit is on/off.

However, the procedures for replacement are different.

Refer to the operating instructions for the optional extension

unit when replacing the hard disk in the extension unit.

There are two hard disks in this unit. In case one of them

malfunctions during recording, it is possible to keep record-

ing with the other hard disk (mirror function).

The internal hard disk of this unit is virtually divided into 3

areas to manage the hard disk.

Normal recording area: An area into which images are

recorded at times other than an event occurrence such

as manual recording.

Event recording area: An area into which images are

recorded at an event occurrence.

When replacing the hard disk drive after turn-

ing off the power of the unit.

z Turn off the power of the unit and detach the power

plug from the outlet.

Copy area: An area into which copy data is stored.

x Do the following to replace the hard disk drive.

It is possible to check the available disk space for each

area on "Disk Info" of "Maintenance" on the SETUP MENU.

(Refer to page 135.)

• When connecting an optional extension unit (WJ-

HDE300 series), it is possible to create a pre-recording

area to perform pre-event recording (page 147) for up

to 60 minutes.

1. Open the connectors cover on the front panel and

remove the fixing screws.

Detach the front panel by sliding it after removing the

screws.

Operations for the hard disk drive such as initialization (for-

matting) of the hard disk drive in the unit or the optional

extension unit, or mirroring, etc., can be performed in the

"HDD DISK MENU". (Refer to page 143.)

Note: It is necessary to create either the normal recording

area or the event record area. If the normal recording

area is not created, manual recording images and

schedule recording images are recorded into the event

recording area. If the event recording area is not creat-

ed, event recording images and emergency recording

images are recorded into the normal recording area.

Screw

Connectors cover

Important:

• Do not detach the cable connecting the unit and the

front panel while the HDD status indicators are still lit or

until 30 seconds have passed since the HDD status

indicators went off.

• Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

• Do not stack them, or keep them upright.

• Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 kgf · cm))

• Avoid rapid changes in the temperature/humidity to

prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within 15

°C/h (59 °F/h))

140

2. Remove the cable from the front panel.

5. Detach the flat cable and the power supply cable from

the hard disk drive. Detach the flat cable only from the

hard disk drive. (Do not detach the flat cable from the

circuit board.)

When pulling the flat cable to detach from the hard disk

drive, hold the pull-ring on the connector, not cable.

Otherwise, it may cause breaking of wire.

After detaching the cables, remove the screw on point

Front panel

connector

Then, remove the four screws fixing the lower hard disk

drive.

When removing, hold the hard disk drive securely to

prevent it from falling.

After removing the four screws, detach the hard disk

drive from the hard disk drive mounting angle.

3. Remove the screws fixing the mounting unit, and then

pull the hard disk drive mounting angle toward you.

Screw removed from

point A

Hold these

tabs and pull

Connector of the

power supply cable

Screw removed from point A

Screws

SSD

Only the upper and lower holes on both sides will be

used when fixing by screws even though there are 3

holes each on both sides.

Screws for the lower hard disk drive

(4 screws: 2 screws each

on the both sides)

4. Remove the four screws fixing the upper hard disk

drive.

Hard disk drive mounting angle

When removing, hold the hard disk drive securely to

prevent it from falling.

Then, detach the flat cable from the hard disk drive and

detach the hard disk drive from the hard disk mounting

angle.

6. Install the new hard disk drive in the reverse order used

for detaching the hard disk drive.

Confirm that the hard disk drive is set as master using

the jumper connector.

Jumper pin

Important:

Power supply

Pull-ring

cable

• When installing, confirm that there is no dust around the

connectors. Adhesion of dust may cause malfunction.

• The jumper connector setting differs depending on the

models or the manufacturers. Refer to the indication

label or the operating instructions of the used hard disk

drive.

Flat cable

• Attach the connector and the screws firmly. Otherwise,

it may cause problems.

SSD

Screws for the upper

hard disk drive

(4 screws: 2 screws each

on the both sides)

Hard disk drive mounting angle

141

c After replacing the hard disk drive, insert the power

plug into the outlet and turn on the power of the unit.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automati-

cally after the restart.

ꢀ When replacing the built-in hard disk of the

extension unit

With displaying the HDD SAFETY MODE window, start

replacing the built-in hard disk of the optional extension

unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the optional extension

unit for the descriptions of how to replace the hard disk.

When replacing the hard disk drive without

turning off the power of the unit.

c After completing the replacement of the hard disk,

move the cursor to "OFF" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

z Close the SETUP MENU after selecting "ON" for "HDD

Safety Mode" of "Disk Info" on the "Maintenance" menu.

→ The HDD SAFETY MODE window will be displayed.

→ The unit will restart and the HDD DISK MENU will be

displayed automatically.

v Perform the settings for the disk according to your

needs. Refer to page 147 for further information.

x The procedures are different between the replacement

of the hard disk of the unit and the replacement of the

hard disk of the optional extension unit.

When replacing the built-in hard disk of the unit

Move the cursor to "REMOVE" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will go off.

The power supply to the front panel will be cut and the unit

cannot be operated with the front panel.

Detach the cable from the front panel and start replacing

the built-in hard disk.

Start from step 2 on page 140 to replace the built-in hard

disk.

Important:

Detach the cable from the front panel after confirming

that the OPERATE indicator on the front panel is not lit.

Otherwise, it may cause malfunction.

The OPERATE indicator on the front panel will light by

attaching the cable to the front panel. The power will be

supplied to the front panel and the unit can be operated

with the front panel.

142

I About the HDD DISK MENU

The operations regarding the hard disk can be performed by displaying the "HDD DISK MENU" on monitor 2.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed when the SET button is pressed while displaying the system check complete window.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will also be displayed automatically after replacing or removing the hard disk.

The following operations can be performed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Setting item

FORMAT

Description

Page

145

Formats (initializes) the hard disk. It can also change the setting values for

the recording area respectively. Mirroring can also be started on this menu.

MIRROR ON

MIRROR OFF

REMOVE

RESTART

EXIT

Recovers the mirrored hard disk.

Cancels mirroring.

150

151

–

Removes the hard disk drive from the system logically.

Restarts this unit.

Closes the "HDD DISK MENU".

–

I Display of the HDD DISK MENU

Information of the hard disk drive of the unit or the optional extension unit will be displayed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Main unit/optional extension unit

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

Information about hard disk located in the main unit and optional exten-

sion unit

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

160GB: Indicates the hard disk capacity (disk existed when

last started up)

ERROR: Indicates that the hard disk has failed to be initial-

ized.

160GB M: Indicates the hard disk capacity (mirrored disk

existed when last started up)

Important:

ADD (160GB): Indicates that this hard disk is newly mount-

ed at this startup, but that it was not mounted last time.

Those parenthesized numbers indicate the capacity of

the hard disk.

• It is impossible to operate the unit when there is a hard

disk with indications of * (capacity), * (ERROR), LOST

or ERROR. In this case, remove the relevant hard disk.

(Refer to page 151.)

ADD (ERROR): Indicates that this hard disk is newly

mounted at this startup, but that it was not mounted last

time. Then, an error is detected on the hard disk.

* (160GB): Indicates that a different hard disk from the one

that existed at the last startup is mounted. Those paren-

thesized numbers indicate the capacity of the hard

disk.

* (ERROR): Indicates that a different hard disk from the one

that existed at the last startup is mounted, and an error

has been detected on the hard disk.

• Hard disks with ADD (capacity) indication are not initial-

ized yet.

First, initialize them. It is impossible to record images on

it or to use it as a copy destination without initialization.

Note: The displayed available disk space on this menu will

not include the space required for data management.

Therefore, the understated available disk space will be

displayed.

It is possible to display information about the recording

area (allocated disk size for normal recording area,

event recording area and copy area) by pressing the

SETUP/ESC button while displaying the "TOP MENU" of

the "HDD DISK MENU".

LOST: Indicates that a position where a hard disk was

mounted at the last startup has no hard disk.

–: Indicates that a hard disk is not mounted this time nor

was it at the last startup.

143

I RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit

Summary of the RAID 5 function (Redundant

Arrays for Independent Disks, independent

data disks with distributed parity blocks)

ꢀ Setup/cancel the RAID 5 function

Do the following to set or cancel the RAID 5 function with an

optional extension unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the extension unit for

further information.

It is possible to use the RAID 5 function with an optional

extension unit.

RAID level 5 regards 3 or more drives as one drive, and it is

possible to read data by attaching error correction data

even though one of the drives is broken automatically. (It is

impossible to recover data if two drives are simultaneously

damaged or the second drive fails during the data recovery

process.)

RAID level 5 requires a minimum of 3 drives to implement.

When using the RAID function, the logical disk size of the

extension unit will be as below.

z Make sure that the power of this unit and all of the

extension units to be connected is OFF.

x To set the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of the

extension unit to "RAID 5".

To cancel the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of

the extension unit to "SINGLE".

c Make sure that the HDD POWER switch of the extension

Logical disk size = Smallest size of the disk among the

disks in the extension unit x (Number of the disks in the

extension unit - 1)

unit is "ON".

v Turn the power of the extension unit on.

Note: Depending on the model of a hard disk drive, the

logical disk size may be a few percent smaller than the

size resulting from the formula above.

b Turn the power of this unit on.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automati-

cally after the system check when the hard disk

configuration has been changed such as when an

extension unit is newly connected.

Important:

• When connecting two extension units or more with this

unit, it is impossible to connect the extension unit with

the RAID 5 function and the one without the RAID 5

function at the same time.

• When the RAID 5 function is used, it is impossible to

use two hard disks in this unit. The recorded pictures in

those disks will not be deleted.

Important:

• When the RAID 5 function is set or canceled, all data on

each hard disk of the extension unit will be deleted.

• When turning the power on, turn on the power of the

extension unit first, and then turn the power of this unit

on. Otherwise, the extension unit may not work correct-

ly.

144

v Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

I Formatting (Initialization) the

Hard Disk

It is necessary to initialize the hard disk in the following

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available

to enter numbers for password.

cases.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 58.

• When replacing the hard disk of this unit

• When operating the unit for the first time after connect-

ing the optional extension unit to this unit

b Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

Important:

(CD) and press the SET button.

When the hard disk is formatted (initialized), all of the

recorded images will be deleted.

[Screenshot 3]

The "THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu will be dis-

played.

ꢀ Formatting (initialization) all hard

disks (unit)

All hard disks including the built-in hard disks and the hard

disks in the extension units will be initialized. All units will be

initialized when the RAID 5 function is set.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN 160GB

160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

z Turn on the power of any peripheral devices such as an

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

extension unit connected to this unit.

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

x Turn on the power of this unit and press the SET button

after completing the system check.

n Move the cursor to "ALL UNITS" using the arrows button

(AB) and press the SET button.

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

Select "ALL UNITS" when using the RAID 5 function.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL UNIT ONE UNIT

[Screenshot 1]

MAIN

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

EXT1 480GB

EXT2 480GB

EXT3 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT5 ADD (480GB)

EXT6 480GB

EXT7 LOST

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[Screenshot 4]

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

The "RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISKS" will be dis-

played.

c Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

Digital Disk

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD^R3^e0^co0^rdA^erTHE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISK

Normal area

90GB

Event area

1800GB

Copy area

450GB

Free area

450GB

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

HDD Total capacity : 2790GB

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

m Select a recording area using the arrows button (A B)

and rotate the jog dial to set the capacity for the select-

ed recording area.

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Repeat this operation to set the capacity for the other

recording areas.

145

[Screenshot 2]

, Press the SET button after setting.

The password entry window will be displayed.

[Screenshot 5]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

Digital Disk

WJ-HD^R3^e0^co0^rdA^er

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT RECORDING AREA SETUP OF ALL DISK

Enter the password.

160GB

Normal area

90GB

Event area

Copy area

Free area

450GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE

160GB

CANCEL

Starting format of all HDDs,

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

1800GB

450GB

and all of data in HDDs

are going to be erased.

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

HDD Total capacity : 2790GB

EXECUTE CANCEL

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

v Rotate the jog dial to enter the password for an admin-

istrator.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available

to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 58.

. Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Formatting will start and the format result dialog

window will be displayed. The "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automatically

after displaying the format result dialog window.

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (C D)

and press the SET button.

ꢀ Formatting (initialization) the

selected hard disk (unit)

[Screenshot 3]

The "THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu will be dis-

played.

Do the following to format the selected hard disk (the

selected unit when using the RAID 5 function).

z Turn on the power of any peripheral devices such as an

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

extension unit connected to this unit.

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN 160GB

160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

x Turn on the power of this unit.

160GB

An image saying that the system check has been com-

pleted will be displayed.

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played automatically.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL UNIT

ONE UNIT

MAIN

EXT1 480GB

EXT2 480GB

EXT3 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT5 ADD (480GB)

EXT6 480GB

EXT7 LOST

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

n Move the cursor to "SELECTED DISK" using the arrows

button (A B) and press the SET button.

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

When using the RAID 5 function, select "ONE UNIT" on

"THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT" menu.

c Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

146

[Screenshot 4]

, Select a setting method for each recording area from

the following using the arrows button (A B) and press

the SET button.

The "DISK SELECT" menu will be displayed.

When using the RAID 5 function, the "UNIT SELECTION"

menu will be displayed.

Auto Setup: Assigns the same proportion for each

recording area as the proportion of the existing

hard disks. (→ step 9)

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT DISK SELECT

All Copy Area: Sets the whole selected hard disk (unit)

Select HDD to be formatted,and press [SET]key.

160GB

as the copy area. (→ step 9)

MAIN

EXT1

160GB

All Pre REC Area: Sets the whole selected hard disk

(extension unit) as the pre-recording area. (→ step

10)

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

Detailed Setup: Sets each recording area individually.

(→ step 11)

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Important:

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT UNIT SELECTION

WJ-HD300A

When the built-in hard disk of this unit is selected, "All

Pre REC Area" is not available.

Select HDD to be formatted,and press [SET] key.

MAIN

EXT1

480GB

EXT2 480GB

EXT3 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT5 ADD (480GB)

EXT6 480GB

EXT7 LOST

[Screenshot 6]

The confirmation menu of the set recording area will be dis-

played.

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK SETTING METHOD

AUTO SETUP

Normal area

119GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

0GB

Free area

0GB

m Move the cursor to a desired hard disk (unit) to be for-

matted (initialized) using the arrows button (C D A

B), and press the SET button.

HDD Total capacity:119GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

[Screenshot 5]

"THE SETTING METHOD" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK SELECT

THE SETTING METHOD

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK SETTING METHOD

ALL COPY AREA

160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

MAIN

EXT1

160GB

Normal area

0GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

119GB

Free area

0GB

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

HDD Total capacity:119GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

DISK SELECT THE SETTING METHOD

WJ-HD300A

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

MAIN

EXT1

480GB

. Confirm the capacity of the set recording area and

press the SET button.

EXT2 480GB

EXT3 480GB

EXT4 *(480GB)

EXT5 ADD (480GB)

EXT6 480GB

→ The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

(→ step 13)

EXT7 LOST

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

147

[Screenshot 7]

[Screenshot 9]

The "PRE RECORDING AREAS" menu will be displayed.

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK SETTING METHOD

PRE RECORDING AREAS

WJ-HD300A

DISK SETTING METHOD

DETAILED SETUP

1CH

0GB

2CH

0GB

3CH

0GB

4CH

0GB

5CH

0GB

6CH

0GB

7CH

0GB

8CH

0GB

Normal area

110GB

Event area

Copy area Free area

Starting one (1) disk formatting.

0GB 0GB 30GB

All of contents in the disk is erased.

9CH

0GB

10CH

0GB

11CH

0GB

12CH

0GB

13CH

0GB

14CH

0GB

15CH

0GB

16CH

0GB

FREE

0GB

EXECUTE

CANCEL

HDD Total capacity:160GB

HDD CAPACITY:160GB

[

]

[

]

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

⁄ Select the camera channel for pre-event recording

using the arrows button (C D A B) and assign the

disk space to the selected pre-recording area by rotat-

ing the jog dial.

⁄ Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

→ Formatting will start and the "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or

more camera channels.

Press the SET button after setting.

→ The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

(→ step 13)

Important:

It is impossible to select the camera channel to which

the pre-recording area on another hard disk (extension

unit) is already assigned.

[Screenshot 8]

The "DETAILED SETUP" menu will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK SETTING METHOD

DETAILED SETUP

Normal area

119GB

Event area

0GB

Copy area

0GB

Free area

50GB

HDD Total capacity:119GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

⁄ Select the recording area using the arrows button (A

B) and assign the disk space to the selected recording

area by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or

more recording areas.

⁄ Press the SET button after setting.

148

I Setting for Mirroring

Mirroring is the function that records camera images onto

two hard disks simultaneously. In case one hard disk has a

problem, image data will be stored on the other hard disk.

The credibility of the disk can be enhanced.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

It is recommended to activate the mirroring function for the

first use of this unit.

When the mirroring function is activated with remaining

recorded images in the hard disk, those recorded images

in the hard disk will be deleted.

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Important:

• The mirroring function can be configured only by two of

the built-in hard disks.

• The size of the two hard disks used for the mirroring

function must be the same.

• When using the RAID 5 function, it is impossible to acti-

vate the mirroring function.

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available

to enter numbers for the password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 58.

ꢀ Start mirroring

Do the following to activate the mirroring function.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(CD) and press the SET button.

z Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been com-

pleted will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

ALL FORMAT SELECTED DISC MIRROR FORMAT

MAIN 160GB

160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

b Move the cursor to "MIRROR FORMAT" using the

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

arrows button (CD) and press the SET button.

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

[Screenshot 4]

The "MIRROR AREA SETUP" menu will be displayed.

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK SETTING METHOD

MIRROR AREA SETUP

Normal area

10GB

Event area

90GB

Copy area

30GB

Free area

30GB

x Move the cursor to "FORMAT" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

HDD Total capacity:160GB

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

149

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

n Select a recording area using the arrows button (C D

A B), and assign the disk space to the selected

recording area by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat this operation to assign disk space to two or

more recording areas.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

m Press the SET button after setting.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

[Screenshot 5]

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A

DISK CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

MIRROR AREA SETUP

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

Normal area

110GB

Event area

Copy area

Free area

Starting mirror format of HDDs

00GB

30GB

in main unit, and all of data

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available

to enter numbers for password.

in HDDs are going to be erased.

EXECUTE

CANCEL

HDD Total capacity:160GB

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 58.

[

]

[

]

RETURN: SETUP/ESC OK : SET

, Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(A B) and press the SET button.

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(CD) and press the SET button.

→ Mirroring will start and the "TOP MENU" of the "HDD

DISK MENU" will be displayed.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

ꢀ Cancel mirroring (MIRROR OFF)

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

Do the following to cancel the mirroring function.

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

z Turn on the power of this unit.

Mirror "OFF" in main unit.

160GB

An image saying that the system check has been com-

pleted will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

CANCEL

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (A B)

and press the SET button.

→ Mirroring will be canceled.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

Note: One of the two hard disks involved in mirroring

will be indicated as "ADD (capacity)" on the "TOP

MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" after canceling the

mirroring function.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVELINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

ꢀ Hard disk recovery (MIRROR ON)

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

Do the following to recover the hard disk when one of the

hard disks involved in mirroring is damaged while mirroring,

or when one of the hard disks is replaced.

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

By completing the following procedures, recovery of the

hard disk will start when the unit is in operation after the

HDD DISK MENU is closed.

x Move the cursor to "MIRROR OFF" using the arrows but-

ton (A B) and press the SET button.

z Turn on the power of this unit.

An image saying that the system check has been com-

pleted will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

150

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

[Screenshot 3]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

[Screenshot 1]

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

"ON" in m16

Bnit.

160GB

CANCEL

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

*(ERROR)

b Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button (A B)

and press the SET button.

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

→ Recovery of the hard disk will start when the unit is

in operation after the "HDD DISK MENU" is closed.

x Move the cursor to "MIRROR ON" using the arrows but-

ton (A B) and press the SET button.

ꢀ Remove the Hard Disk Logically and

Reconfigure it (REMOVE LINK)

Note: When it is impossible to recover the hard disk

(mirror on) such in case that the hard disk size to be

recovered is too small, it is impossible to select

"MIRROR ON".

It is possible to remove the hard disk logically (unmount)

without uninstalling (detaching) the hard disk physically. It

is recommended to remove the hard disk logically when the

hard disk of the unit or an extension unit is having trouble

(hard disk indicated with "*", "LOST" or "ERROR") and it is

necessary to remove it temporarily but not to stop opera-

tion.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Do the following to remove the hard disk logically.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

z Turn on the power of this unit.

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

An image saying that the system check has been com-

pleted will be displayed.

Press the SET button after the image is displayed.

Enter the password.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

Note: When the hard disk is replaced or removed, the

"TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be auto-

matically displayed.

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

[Screenshot 1]

The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available

to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 58.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

*(ERROR)

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

(CD) and press the SET button.

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

x Move the cursor to "REMOVE LINK" using the arrows

button (A B) and press the SET button.

151

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry window will be displayed.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Enter the password.

160GB

*(ERROR)

EXECUTE CANCEL

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

c Enter the password for an administrator by rotating the

jog dial.

The camera selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for the WJ-

HD316A, [1] - [9], [0] for the WJ-HD309A) are available

to enter numbers for password.

The same method is used to enter, insert and delete

characters as for attaching text information to images.

Refer to page 58.

[Screenshot 3]

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU

FORMAT

MIRROR ON MIRROR OFF REMOVE LINK RESTART

EXIT

MAIN 160GB M

EXT1 160GB

EXT2 160GB

EXT3 160GB

EXT4 *(160GB)

160GB M

Removing all"*" and lost links

160GB

EXECUTE

CANCEL

*(ERROR)

160GB

EXT5 ADD (160GB) ADD (ERROR) 160GB

EXT6 160GB

EXT7 LOST

160GB

[

]

[

]

Information of recording areas : SETUP/ESC OK : SET

v Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(DC), and press the SET button.

b Move the cursor to "EXECUTE" using the arrows button

(AB), and press the SET button.

→ The hard disk will be removed logically and the

confirmation dialog window will be displayed.

[Screenshot 4]

The confirmation dialog window will be displayed after logi-

cal remove of the hard disk is started.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300A TOP MENU REMOVING

HDD DISK MENU

REMOVING

MAIN : REMOVED OK

EXT1–4 : REMOVED OK

EXT2–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT2–2 : REMOVED OK

EXT5–3 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–1 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–2 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–3 : REMOVED OK

EXT6–4 : REMOVED OK

EXT7–1 : REMOVED OK

n The "TOP MENU" of the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played when logical remove has been completed.

152

SERIAL (RS232C) CONNECTOR COMMAND REFERENCE

I SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol

With the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, you can control functions of this unit by transferring the specified commands from a per-

sonal computer (PC) to this unit.

Notes:

• This unit does not support the communication converted between the SERIAL (RS232C) and USB interface.

• When controlling the unit with the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, the following parameters should be identical between the

communication devices.

The setting is available in "SETUP MENU" – "Comm" – "RS232C Setup".

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

I Command Format

The following pages detail how to write the commands.

1. The following details how to write the commands

Code

ASCII

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p] [ETX]

(02H) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – (03H)

STX: This shows the data start. STX (ASCII code: 02h) is always prefixed to data. h shows hexadecimal digit.

Unit address of the unit: Designate the unit address set for "RS232C" of "Comm" on the SETUP MENU.

Transmission command: A command shown in the Command List is designated.

ETX: This shows the data end. ETX (ASCII code: 03h) is always prefixed to data.

The character code is ASCII.

When a command needs a parameter, a colon (:) is used for dividing the command and parameter. The following shows

how to write the commands when two or more commands are specified.

Code

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p1] : [p2] [ETX]

2. Response Command (from the Unit to the PC)

The unit sends back the response command for the transmission command from the PC.

• When the reception was completed successfully

The response command differs between when an ANSWER command (sending back the status or data) is required or

when not required.

• When no ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the same identifier as that in the transmission command, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

Same identifier

153

• When an ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the status or data, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

QSR

[ETX]

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

Status inquiry command

Status information command

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

QRV

[ETX]

[STX]

QRV:1.01:1.01:1.00:1.10 [ETX]

Version inquiry command

Sends back data.

• About ACK code

After receiving a command from the PC, the unit sends back the ACK code to the PC in 20 ms or less.

[ACK] = Reception succeeded (ASCII code: 06H)

After the ACK code has been sent back and the command processing has been completed, the unit sends back the

response command to the PC.

Example:

These are examples for the following operations.

1. Login with the user name of "ADMIN" and with password of "12345".

2. Display images from camera channel 1 on monitor 2.

3. Start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

4. Logout

(1) (PC -> This unit) Login

[STX]AD001;OLI:ADMIN[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]:12345[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP][ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start the login procession of the user name of "ADMIN".

(2) (This unit -> PC) Response against (1).

[STX]AD001;OLI:1[ETX]

(3) (PC -> This unit) Select the monitor 2

[STX]AD001;OMS:0002[ETX]

(4) (This unit -> PC) Response against (3).

[STX]AD001;OMS:0002[ETX]

(5) (PC -> This unit) Display images from the camera channel 1.

[STX]AD001;OCS:00001[ETX]

(6) (This unit - > PC) Response against (5).

[STX]AD001;OCS:00001[ETX]

(7) (PC -> This unit) Playback from the designated time point.

[STX]AD001;ZTP:20030101150000[ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

(8) (This unit - > PC) Response against (7).

[STX]AD001;ZTP: 20030101150000[ETX]

154

(9) (PC -> This unit) Logout.

[STX]AD001;OLO [ETX]

When receiving the command above, the user logged in via SERIAL (RS232C) (ADMIN) will log out.

(10)(This unit - > PC) Response against (9).

[STX]AD001;OLO[ETX]

Note: The character code of [STX], [ETX] and [SP] are as follows.

[STX]: 02h

[ETX]: 03h

[SP] (space): 20h

3. Reception Error

The response command differs between the reception error and parameter error.

• Communication error (Reception error)

When the unit cannot properly receive the command due to the communication error, the unit immediately sends back the

NACK code to the PC. After clearing the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX]

command.

[NCK] = Reception failed (ASCII code: 15H)

Reason for the communication error

1: Parity error (ASCII code: 31H)

2: Framing error (ASCII code: 33H)

3: Overrun error (ASCII code: 34H)

• Parameter error

When the unit cannot properly process the received command, the unit sends back an error code to the PC. After clearing

the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX] command.

[ETX]

=Error

Reason for the error

001: Command invalid (There is no associated command.)

002: Parameter invalid (The number, digit, or range of the command

parameters is incorrect.)

301: Command invalid (The unit does not support the operation mode.)

E: Command error (ASCII code: 45H)

• If the unit receives another command during the response, the unit will respond to the command after processing the cur-

rent response.

• If the unit received the [STX] command again before receiving the [ETX] command, the unit will clear the internal buffer.

Then, the unit will process the data following to the [STX] command. (The commands received before the second [STX]

command will be canceled.)

• The internal buffer will be cleared when it fills up.*

155

4. PC Connection Example

An RS232C crossing cable is used for connection between the unit and PC. (Refer to the following for the pin array of the SERI-

AL connector and a cable connection sample.)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

D-sub Pin 9

(Female)

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

As viewed from the rear of the

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

Pin No. Signal Name

I/O

Cross cable connection example

RXD

TXD

DTR

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

7 (RTS)

8 (CTS)

3 (TXD)

5 (GND)

2 (RXD)

OUT

–

DSR

RTS

CTS

WJ-HD316A/WJ-HD309A

PC or another device

OUT

156

ꢀ Command Table

Basic Operation

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Forward a field

Rewind a field

Pause during playback

Play

Manual recording

Manual recording with

text

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

ZMR:nn

...

ZMR:nn:ddd ddd

nn=01~99 (Sequence number)

...

ddd ddd: text (200 bytes or less)

Stop

OSP:n

OSP

OSF

n=P: Stops PLAY

n=R: Stops REC

no parameter stops PLAY and REC

n=0F Normal speed

n=1F x2 speed

Skip & play forward

OSF:n

n=2F x5 speed

n=3F x10 speed

n=4F x20 speed

n=5F x50 speed

n=6F x100 speed

n=0S Normal speed

n=1S 1/2 speed

Skip&play reversely

OSR:n

OSR

n=0F Normal speed

n=1F x2 speed

n=2F x5 speed

n=3F x10 speed

n=4F x20 speed

n=5F x50 speed

n=6F x100 speed

n=0S Normal speed

n=1S 1/2 speed

Record No. Search and

playback

Time & date search and

playback

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:mm

ZTP:yyyymmddhhnnss

OSK:dnn

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZTP:yyyymmddhhnnss

OSK

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr Record No.

yyyymmddhhnnss:Time & date of playback

image

d=+ Forward

Record skip

– Backward

nn=01 Number of skipped records: Fixed

LISTED Playback

ZLT:n

ZPM

ZLT:n

n=0 OFF

n=1 ON

Playback latest image

A - B repeat playback

ZPM

ZRP:n

ZRP:n:yyyymmddhhnnss

n=0 A - B repeat playback OFF

n=1 Set repeat start point (A point)

n=2 Set repeat end point (B point)

yyyymmddhhnnss: Date and time of A/B point

n=0 COPY SETUP MENU OFF

n=1 COPY SETUP MENU ON

n=0 Text display OFF

n=1 Text display ON

Display COPY SETUP

Display text

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

Multi-screen switching

m=0 4-split screen

m=1 7-split screen

m=2 9-split screen

m=3 10-split screen

m=4 13-split screen

m=5 16-split screen

nnnn=0001 Select MON 1

nnnn=0002 Select MON 2

Monitor selection

Camera selection

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

ccccc: Camera CH

157

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Electronic zooming

OZM:m

OZM:n

m=0 Electronic zooming OFF

m=1 Electronic zooming ON

m=> Switch x2 -> x4

m=< Switch x4 -> x2

m=+ Switch Electronic zooming OFF -> x2 ->

x4 -> Electronic zooming OFF -> ...

m=- Switch x4 -> x2 -> Electronic zooming OFF

-> x4 -> ...

n=0 Electronic zooming OFF

n=2 x2

n=4 x4

Start sequence

Stop sequence

Disk selection

OQT:01F

OQS:0

ZDS:k

OQT:01F:010

OQS

ZDS:k

k=0 HDD normal/event recording sector

k=1 HDD copy sector

k=2 Disk connected to COPY 1

k=3 Disk connected to COPY 2

Marking

ZMP

Alarm Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Alarm input

OAI:b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄

OAI

b₁b₂b₃: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Alarm CH information (binary)

Alarm input with text

ZAI:b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄:

nn:ddd ddd

ZAI:nn

b₁b₂b₃: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Alarm CH information (binary)

nn=01 - 99 (Sequence No)

...

ddd ddd: text (200 bytes or less)

Alarm reset

OAL:n

MAD:n

–

OAL

n=0 Alarm all reset

n=1 Alarm reset

n=0 Alarm suspension OFF

n=1 Alarm suspension ON

n=0 LED OFF

n=1 LED ON

Alarm suspension

MAD:n

ALD:n

Alarm change information

(LED indication)

n=2 LED Blinking

Alarm change information

–

ALM: b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄

b1b2b3: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a1a2a3a4: Alarm CH information (binary)

Setup Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Display SETUP MENU

MSU:n

n=0 SETUP MENU OFF

n=1 SETUP MENU ON

Move cursor

DCR:n1n2

DCR

n1n2=A1 Right

n1n2=C1 Upward

n1n2=E1 Left

n1n2=G1 Downward

n1n2=+1 Increment parameter (+)

n1n2=-1 Decrement parameter (–)

n1n2=PD Move to virtual menu (SET)

n1n2=P+ Go to the next page (FWD)

n1n2=P- Go back to the previous page (BACK)

n1n2=PU Move to upper layer (ESC)

Date & Time setup

Summer time setup

Recording mode setup

TSU:yyyymmddhhnn

MST:n

MRM:n

TSU

MST

MRM

yyyymmddhhnn: Date and time

n=0 Standard time n=1 Summer time

n=0 Normal recording mode

n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording

mode

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

OLI:uuu...uuu:

ppp ppp

OLI:n

uuu...uuu: User name (32-byte fixed length)

ppp...ppp: Password (32-byte fixed length)

n=0 Error in user name/password

n=1 Login succeeded

...

n=2 Login failed

Logout

OLO

158

Data Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Copy by specifying

record

ZCR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:m

ZCR

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Copy by specifying date ZCT:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

ZCT

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

data copy

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

data copy

& time

h₁h₁n₁n₁:y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂:s:ccc:m

s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Data copy completed

–

ZEC:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

h₁h₁n₁n₁:

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

data copy

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂

n₂n₂:s:ccc:m

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

data copy

s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Cancel data copy

Erase log

ZDC

ZLC:k

ZDC

ZLC:k

k=1 Event input log

k=2 Error log

k=3 Access log

Log data total number

inquiry

ZLQ:k:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

h₁h₁n₁n₁:y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂

ZLQ:k:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁

d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

k=0 Record list

k=1 Event input log

k=2 Error log

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂:dddddddd

k=3 (Access log)

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

inquiry range

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

inquiry range

dddddddd: Log data total number

Log readout

ZLR:yyyymmdd

hhnn:mmmmmmmm

ZLR:k:<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2: :<Log Data

k=1 (Event input log)

k=2 (Error log)

k=3 (Access log)

...

n>sn

yyyymmddhhnn Start date & time of readout

logs

mmmmmmmm: Total number of acquired logs

(00000000 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data

sn: 0-9 Cyclic number

Record list acquisition

ZGR:yyyymmddnn

:nnnnnnnn

ZGR<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2: :<Log Data n>sn

yyyymmddhhnn: Start date & time of readout

list

mmmmmmmm: Total record number in the

acquired list (00000001 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data

...

sn: 0-9 Cyclic number

Text acquisition

Text writing

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

<TEXT>: text data

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

<TEXT>: text data 200 bytes or less

Disk End Notification

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Disk end auto-notification MDE:n

setting

MDE:n

n=0 (Auto-notification OFF)

n=1 (Auto-notification ON)

Disk end auto-notification HDE:–

HDE:p

p=1 (Normal recording sector)

p=2 (Event recording sector)

p=3 (Copy sector)

159

Search Operation

Item

Display the search win-

dow

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

ZTL:n ZTL:n

Parameter (ASCII)

n=0 (Display the search window)

n=1 (Display the recording event list)

n=2 (Display the recording event thumbnail)

n=3 (Display the VMD search list)

n=4 (Display the VMD search thumbnail)

n=5 (Display the marking search list)

n=6 (Display the marking search thumbnail)

n=7 (Display the menu for playback by desig-

nating time and date)

Display Operation

Item

Switch display

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

DIN:n DIN

Parameter (ASCII)

n=+

Inquiry

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Available disk space

inquiry

QHR:p

QHR:p:sss

p=1 HDD normal recording sector

p=2 HDD event recording sector

p=3 HDD copy sector

p=4 Disk connected to COPY 1

p=5 Disk connected to COPY 2

sss: Available disk space (%)

ID request

QID

QIB

QIC

QID:WJ-HD309A

QID:WJ-HD316A

Interface ID request

QIB:WJ-HD309A

QIB:WJ-HD316A

Production category

request

QIC:2

Alarm information request QLD:0

QLD:n

n=0 (No alarm)

n=1 (Alarm end)

n=2 (Under alarm operation)

Software version inquiry

Status inquiry

QRV

QSR

QRV:n.nn

QSR:Status 1:Status 2

n.nn: Software version

...

Following response commands are sends back

...

for "Status 1:Status 2

msu:0 Under normal operation

msu:1 Under setting

oms:0001 Monitor 1

oms:0002 Monitor 2

ocs:ccccc ccccc: Camera number

otc:n Multiscreen segment display pattern

n=0: 4 segments

n=1: 7segments

n=2: 9 segments

n=3: 10 segments

n=4: 13 segments

n=5: 16 segments

oqt: 01F Sequence activated

ozm: 0 Zoom OFF

ozm: 2 x2 zoom

ozm: 4 x4 zoom

opa: Currently playback is being paused

opl: Currently playback is being performed

orc: Currently recording is being performed

osf:n: Currently fast playback is being per-

formed

osp:p: Currently playback is being stopped

osp:r: Currently recording is being stopped

osr:n: Currently fast reverse playback is being

performed

mad: 0 Alarm suspension OFF

mad: 1 Alarm suspension ON

160

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

ztl:n Search editing area ON

n=0 Search editing area OFF

n=1 Recording event search list ON

n=2 Recording event search thumbnail

n=3 VMD search list ON

n=4 VMD search thumbnail ON

n=5 Marking search list ON

n=6 Marking search thumbnail ON

n=7 Search playback display ON

zdt:0 Text display OFF

zdt:1 Text display ON

Recording mode inquiry

Monitor status inquiry

QRM

ZQM

QRM:n

n=0 Normal recording mode

n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording

mode

ZQM:m:a₁a₂a₃a₄:yyyy

mmddhhnnss

m=0 Live

m=1 Live sequence

m=2 Playback

m=3 Other statuses

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Camera CH information (binary)

yyyymmddhhnnss: Playback time

Recording status inquiry

ZQS

ZQS:1 CH recording activated: Recording status nn=00 (Recording stop)

...

2 CH recording activated 16

nn=01 (Manual recording activated)

nn=02 (Event recording activated)

nn=03 (Schedule recording activated)

nn=04 (Emergency recording activated)

CH recording activated

Record number informa-

tion

–

ZRN:sss:nn:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

:nnyyyymmddhhnnss:

ccc:x;yyy:t

sss: Unit address

nn=Sequence number

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number

yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording event date and

time

ccc: Camera CH

x=0 Manual recording

x=1 Schedule recording

x=2 VMD recording

x=3 Alarm port recording

x=4 Command alarm recording

x=5 VIDEO LOSS recording

x=6 Emergency recording

yyy: Event-activated CH

t=0 Text included

t=1 Text not included

nn=Sequence number

Camera SYNC status

inquiry

QSY:a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅

:b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅

QSY:a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅

b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅:s₁s₂s₃sm

a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅- b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅: Range of camera CH

to inquire SYNC status

s₁s₂s₃sm: SYNC status of each camera

...

(s_m=0: SYNC status not found

s_m=1: SYNC status found)

161

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Record information

inquiry

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:

ccc:q:nnnn:yyyymmdd

hhnnss:nnss:t:ssssss

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number

ccc: Camera CH

q: picture quality (0 (Super Fine), 1 (Fine), 2

(Normal), 3 (Extended))

nnnn: Recording rate

yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording start date and

time

nnss: Recording total time

t=0 Text included

t=1 Text not included

ssssss: Record size [KB]

Communication

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

RCK RCK

Parameter (ASCII)

Communication check

162

FLOWCHART OF THE SETUP MENU

Display

REC & Event

Network

Advanced Menu

SETUP MENU (Quick)

SETUP MENU (Advanced)

System

Basic Setup

Recording

REC Setup

Event

Event Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Event Setup

VMD

System

Recording

Schedule

Time & Date

Emergency REC

REC PROGRAM

Event Setup

Video Loss

Time & Date

Summer Time

(Day Light Savings)

Table

REC PROGRAM

Recording Program

Schedule

EVENT PROGRAM

System

User Regist.

Event Setup

Terminal/Command

Alarm

EVENT PROGRAM

Event Program

Event

VMD Setup

Event Program

VMD

System

User Edit

VMD Area Setup

For each camera

Event Program

Video Loss

Event

Alarm Setup

System

User Delete

Event Program

Terminal/Command

Alarm

Event

Terminal Setup

System

Host Regist.

Schedule

Special Days

System

Host Edit

System

Host Delete

System

User Level

System

Save/Load

Switcher

Monitor 1

Display

OSD Setup

Comm

Camera Control

Maintenance

REC Rate

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Camera Title

Live Sequence

Switcher

Monitor 2

Display

Monitor 1

Comm

PS·Data Setup

Maintenance

Disk Info

Monitor 2

PS·Data Setup

Live Sequence

Camera Number Setup

Display

Monitor 2

Maintenance

Version info

Comm

RS485 Setup

Control Camera CH

Comm

Maintenance

RS232C Setup

Disk End Mode

Comm

NW Setup 1

Maintenance

Disk Capacity

Comm

NW Setup 2

Maintenance

Disk Delete

Comm

NTP Setup

Maintenance

Event Log

Maintenance

Error Log

Maintenance

Access Log

163

PARAMETERS AND THE DEFAULT SETTINGS OF THE SETUP MENU

These are the setting parameters and the default settings of the items on the SETUP MENU.

Refer to these as reference.

SETUP MENU (Quick)

Setup Menu

Display

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Date Format

YY.MM.DD/MMM.DD.YY/DD.MMM.YY

MMM.DD.YY

Time Format

24h/12h

24h

Time & Date

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title

L-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-UPPER/R-LOWER

L-UPPER

Camera Title Display Position

L-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-UPPER/R-LOWER/

CENTER

R-UPPER

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

WJ-HD316A:

1/2/.../16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

HD316A: Step1: CAM1,

Step2: CAM2, ...... Step16: CAM16

HD309A: Step1: CAM1,

Step2: CAM2, ...... Step9:CAM9

1/2/.../9/1-4/5-8/9-9/1-9/--

[Operating via a network]

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/9SCREEN/--

1/2/.../256/--

2 s

1 s/2 s/.../30 s

Summer Time

(Day Light Savings)

IN/OUT/AUTO

OUT

Beep (Operation)

Language

ON/OFF

OFF

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/

DEUTSCH/ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

ENGLISH

REC & Event

REC Type

Resolution

Manual REC

REC Rate

QUICK/ADVANCED

QUICK

FIELD

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/SIF

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/

15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

60 ips

FQB

Quality

Event REC

REC Rate

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/

15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

60 ips

FQB

Quality

Time

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB

1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/...../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/

2 min/...../10 min/20 min/30 min/...../60 min/

MANUAL/CONTINUE

30 s

Operation Mode

Event Setup

ALARM/ACT DET/OFF

ALARM

VMD: Alarm output/Buzzer 1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/...../5 min/

EXT/OFF

OFF

2 s

Video Loss: Alarm Output/ 1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/...../5 min/

Buzzer

EXT/OFF

Terminal/Command Alarm: 1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/...../5 min/

Alarm Output/Buzzer EXT/OFF

2 s

164

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

OFF

Power ON Manual REC

VMD Setup

ON/OFF

(SETUP AREA)

(SETUP ALL AREA)

(DELETE AREA)

(DELETE ALL AREA)

(SENSITIVITY)

(VMD MODE)

LOW/MID/HIGH/OFF

OFF

ANY AREA/VECTOR/DURATION

ANY AREA

(EXIT)

Network

Line Speed

HTTP Port Number

DHCP

AUTO/10-HALF/10-FULL/100-HALF/100-FULL

AUTO

ON/OFF

OFF

IP Address

Subnet mask

Gateway

192.168.000.250

255.255.255.000

192.168.000.001

192.168.000.250

255.255.255.000

192.168.000.001

SETUP MENU (Advanced)

*1: N: Available only using PC via a network, U: Available

only operating the unit directly, Blank: Available either of

using PC via a network or operating the unit directly

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

System

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

PSD User

12345

ADMIN

Auto Login

ON/OFF

Auto Login User

Auto Logout

Priority

ADMIN

ON/OFF

OFF

Follow the priority./Pre-priority/Post-priority

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/5 min

Follow the priority.

5 s

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/

DEUTSCH/ITALIANO/RUSSIAN/CHINESE

ENGLISH

OFF

Beep (Operation)

Buzzer (Error)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

ON/OFF

OFF/1 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/...../5 min/EXT 2 s

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/4 min/5 min

10 s

OFF/COPY1/COPY1 (ALT)/COPY2/

COPY2 (ALT)

OFF

Time & Date

Date Format

Time Format

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

YY.MM.DD/MMM.DD.YY/DD.MMM.YY

24 h/12 h

MMM.DD.YY

12 h

ON/OFF

OFF

0:00/1:00/...../23:00

0:00

Summer Time(Day Light Savings) IN/OUT/AUTO

OUT

Summer Time(Day Light Savings)

Table

IN: Last Sunday of March at 2:00 a.m.

OUT: Last Sunday of October at 2:00 a.m.

165

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

User Regist.

User Edit

User Name

User Password

Level

User Delete

1/2/3

1/2/...../16

Priority

Default Screen

WJ-HD316A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ

WJ-HD309A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ

CAM1

Camera Partitioning

--/View/View/Operate

(--/View/View&Operate: when using PC

via a network)

View/Operate

(View&Operate: when using PC

via a network)

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host IP Address

Level

LV1/LV2/LV3

1/2/...../16

LV1

Host Delete

Priority

Default Screen

WJ-HD316A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/16SCREEN/SEQ

WJ-HD309A

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ

CAM1

Camera Partitioning

--/View/View/Operate

(--/View/View&Operate: when using PC

via a network)

View/Operate

(View&Operate: when using PC

via a network)

User Level

Setup

LV1,LV2,LV3

LV1

Setup Status

LV1,LV2

LV1

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

LV1,LV2

LV1

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

LV1

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

LV1

LV1,LV2

LV1,LV2,LV3

Recording

REC Setup

REC Type

QUICK/ADVANCED

QUICK

Recording

ON/OFF

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Color Mode

ON/OFF

OFF

MON2/ALL

ALL

COLOR FINE/COLOR STD/B/W

ON/OFF

COLOR STD

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

REC Priority

ON/OFF

Manual REC/Schedule REC/Event REC

1: Event REC

2: Manual REC

3: Schedule REC

Audio Allocation

HD316A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2.....CAM16

HD309A: OFF/CAM1/.....CAM9

AUDIO1 to 4: OFF

166

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Emergency REC

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/SIF

FIELD

Recording Time

1 s/2 s/..../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min/..../10 min/

20 min/30 min40 min/50 min/60 min/MANUAL/

CONTINUE

10 s

Recording Rate and Quality

Auto Copy

Recording rate: 1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/

7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

Quality: SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/

EXA/EXB

3 ips

SFB

OFF

OFF/ON

Event

Event Setup

Alarm Output

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/...../5 min/EXT

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: --

Terminal/Command Alarm: 2 s

Output Terminal

HD316A: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM16

HD309A: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM9

HD316A: CAM1: TRM1, CAM2: TRM2,

.....CAM16: TRM16

HD309A: CAM1: TRM1, CAM2: TRM2,

.....CAM9: TRM9

(This setting is available only for

"VMD" and "Terminal Alarm".)

Buzzer

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/

2 min/...../5 min/EXT

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: 2 s

Terminal/Command Alarm: 2 s

Monitor1 Action

HD316A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with

a video loss occurrence

Terminal/Command Alarm: Same

number for camera channel number

and alarm number

Monitor2 Action

HD316A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309A: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with

a video loss occurrence

Terminal/Command Alarm: Same

number for camera channel number

and alarm number

VMD Setup

(SETUP AREA)

(SETUP ALL AREA)

(DELETE AREA)

(DELETE ALL AREA)

(SENSITIVITY)

(VMD MODE)

LOW/MID/HIGH/OFF

OFF

ANY AREA/VECTOR/DURATION

ANY AREA

(EXIT)

Alarm Setup

Alarm Auto Reset

OFF/1 s/2 s/...../30 s/40 s/50 s/1 min/2 min/3 min/ OFF

4 min/5 min

Alarm Disarm Time

Terminal Setup

2 s/3 s/...../10 s

2 s

Terminal Setup

N.O./N.C.

N.O.

Schedule

Time Table

Period

12:00AM to 12:00AM

12:00AM to 12:00AM (Everyday/Time

zone1)

--:-- to --:-- (Except above)

REC PROGRAM

PROG1/PROG2/PROG3/PROG4

ON/OFF

PROG1

OFF

EVENT PROGRAM

FTP SEND BY PERIODIC

TIMER

ERROR REPORT MAIL

ON/OFF

OFF

WARNING REPORT MAIL

NW BANDWIDTH CONTROL

OFF/32kbps/64kbps/128kbps/256kbps/

512kbps/1024kbps/2Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps

167

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

REC Program

Resolution

RATE

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/FRAME

FIELD

OFF/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/0.5 ips/

1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/

15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

MANUAL: 3 ips

SCHEDULE: OFF

EVENT (PRE): OFF

EVENT (POST): 3 ips

QUALITY

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB

FQB

DURATION (TIME for the unit) 1 s/2 s/...../10 s/20 s/30 s/1 min/2 min,/...../

EVENT (PRE): 10 s

10 min/20 min/...../60 min/MANUAL/CONTINUE EVENT (POST): 30 s

Event Program

Operation Mode

(Mode: when using PC

via a network)

ALARM/ACT DET/OFF

Video Loss, Terminal/Command Alarm:

ALARM

VMD: ACT DET

REC CH

ON/OFF

OFF

Auto Copy

ON/OFF

Preset Position

Serial Notice

Alarm Mail Notice

FTP Alarm Sending

DATE

--/1/2/...../256

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

Special Days

1/1 to 12/31

Mode

MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT/SUN

Switcher

Monitor1

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

WJ-HD316A:

1/2/.../16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

HD316A: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP16: CAM16

HD309A: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP9:CAM9

1/2/.../9/1-4/5-8/9-9/1-9/--

[Operating via a network]

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/9SCREEN/--

1/2/.../256/--

2 s

1 s/2 s/.../30 s

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT/EXT/MON2

ON/OFF

INT

WJ-HD316A:

16SCREEN

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ/--

Secret View

ON/OFF

OFF

168

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Monitor2

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

WJ-HD316A:

1/2/.../16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

HD316A: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, .....STEP16:CAM16

HD309A: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ..... STEP9:CAM9

1/2/.../9/1-4/5-8/9-9/1-9/--

[Operating via a network]

WJ-HD316A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/9SCREEN/--

1/2/.../256/--

2 s

1 s/2 s/.../30 s

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT/EXT

ON/OFF

INT

WJ-HD316A:

QUAD1-4

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

WJ-HD309A:

CAM1/CAM2/.../CAM9/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9/7SCREEN/9SCREEN/SEQ/--

Display

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER

L-UPPER

R-UPPER

L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER/

CENTER

Line Color on the Multi Screen WHITE/GRAY/BLACK

WHITE

Monitor1

Monitor2

Time & Date Display

Camera Title Display

Alarm Display

ON/OFF

Display Mode

MODE1/MODE2/MODE3

UPPER/LOWER

MODE1

LOWER

T&D and Status Display

Position

Camera Title Display

ON/OFF

Comm

Camera Control

COMP

TYPE

S/M/L

HD316A: CAM1to CAM8: S

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM6: S

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX/RS485/OFF/

PSD,

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX,

CAM9 to CAM12: RS485/PSD/OFF,

CAM13 to CAM16: RS485/PSD/OFF

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX/RS485/OFF/

PSD,

CAM9 to CAM12: PSD,

CAM13 to CAM16: PSD

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX,

CAM7 to CAM9: RS485/PSD/OFF

CAM7 to CAM9: PSD

PS·Data Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

001 to 099

001

OFF

9 600

001 to 099

ON/OFF

Baud Rate

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400

Data Bit

Parity

NONE/EVEN/ODD

NONE

Stop Bit

1/2

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1000 ms

OFF/0 s/1 s/5 s

OFF

1 s

Camera Number Setup

001 to 255

HD316A: 1: 001 to 16: 016

HD309A: 1: 001 to 9: 009

169

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

RS485 Setup

Baud Rate

4 800/9 600/19 200

PORT1/PORT2

9 600

Control Camera CH

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM8: PORT1,

CAM9 to CAM16: PORT2

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM8: PORT1,

CAM9: PORT2

Data Bit

Parity

NONE

Stop Bit

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

Unit Address(System)

Baud Rate

Data Bit

001 to 099

001

9 600/19 200/38 400

9 600

7/8

Parity

NONE/EVEN/ODD

ODD

Stop Bit

1/2

Retry Timing

HTTP Port Number

User Authentication

Host Authentication

Line Speed

Live Video Quality

Video Rate

DHCP

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1000 ms

OFF

00000 to 65535

00080

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

AUTO/10-HALF/10-FULL/100-HALF/100-FULL

AUTO

FQB

FAST/MIDDLE/SLOW/VERY SLOW

FAST

ON/OFF

OFF

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

192.168.0.250

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

255.255.255.000

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

192.168.000.001

DNS

ON/OFF

OFF

Primary

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

000.000.000.000

Secondary

DDNS

000.000.000.000 to 254.254.254.254

000.000.000.000

ON/OFF

OFF

NW Setup2

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

Host Name

10 min/30 min/1 h/6 h/24 h

1 h

HD316A: HD316A

HD309A: HD309A

Domain Name

COMMUNITY

localdomain

Network SNMP

Setup

CONTACT

SYSTEM NAME

LOCATION

NTP Setup

Time Adjustment

Time Zone

ON/OFF

OFF

GMT-12:00/GMT-11:00/...../GMT-4:00/

GMT-3:30/GMT-3:00/...../GMT-1:00/GMT/

GMT+1:00/GMT+2:00/GMT+3:00/GMT+3:30/

GMT+4:00/GMT+4:30/GMT+5:00/GMT+5:30/

GMT+5:45/GMT+6:00/GMT+6:30/GMT+7:00/

GMT+8:00/GMT+9:00/GMT+9:30/GMT+10:00/

GMT+11:00/...../GMT+13:00

GMT-5:00

NTP Server Address

Refresh Interval

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

6 h

170

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Network FTP Setup FTP Server Address

User Name

User Password

Mode

SEQUENTIAL/PASSIVE

SEQUENTIAL

Server Directory

File Name

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

TIME & DATE BASE

Interval

01 s

Channel to Send

HD316A: CAM1 to CAM16

HD309A: CAM1 to CAM9

Server Directory

File Name

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

TIME & DATE BASE

Duration-Pre

OFF/1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/6 s/7 s/8 s/9 s/10 s

OFF

Duration-Post

OFF/1 s/2 s/3 s/4 s/5 s/6 s/7 s/8 s/9 s/10 s

5 s

Alter Detect

ON/OFF

OFF

Network Mail Setup Attach Alarm Image

Mail Server Address

Send to

ON/OFF

OFF

Address1

Address2

Address3

Address4

From Address

POP before SMTP

POP Server Address

User Name

ON/OFF

OFF

User Password

Maintenance

Disk Info

Warning for Disk Life Time

10 000 h/20 000 h/30 000 h

20 000 h

(Disk Information:

when using PC via

a network)

HDD Safety Mode

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

ON/OFF

OFF

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

CONTINUE/STOP

OFF/1 %/2 %/···/10 %

CONTINUE

STOP

COPY1

STOP

COPY2

STOP

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

10 %

COPY1

10 %

COPY2

10 %

Auto Delete

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/···.../10DAYS/14DAYS/

30DAYS/45DAYS/60DAYS/90DAYS/

120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

OFF

171

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check the following before requesting repair.

Contact your dealer if a problem cannot be solved even after checking and trying the solution or a problem is not described

below, and when having a problem with installations.

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the power plug is properly connected to the AC

outlet.

–

Power is not turned on.

• Check if the power cord is properly inserted into the power

socket of the unit.

–

The HDD SAFETY MODE win-

dow is displayed after turning

on the power of the unit.

• The HDD SAFETY MODE is set to ON.

In this case, set the HDD SAFETY MODE to OFF.

Refer to p. 69.

• Check if the lens covers of the cameras have been

removed.

–

• Check if the power is supplied to cameras and connected

devices.

–

No camera image is displayed

on MON 1, MON 2, and the

VGA monitor.

Refer to p. 72.

• Check if the cable connections are correct.

• Check the brightness and contrast settings of the moni-

tors.

–

Refer to p. 107

and 110.

• Can the users display camera images on the monitors?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Displayed image does not fit in

the screen.

This is not a malfunction. Images may not fit in the screen of

some monitor models because of their resolutions.

–

The log-in menu does not

appear even if you press the

button of the unit.

–

• Check if any user has logged in with the system controller.

The camera image is dim.

• Check if dust may be sticking to the camera lens.

Refer to p. 107

and 110.

• Can the users display the SETUP MENU on the monitors?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Cannot open SETUP MENU.

• Check if monitor 1 is used to display the SETUP MENU.

The SETUP MENU cannot be displayed on monitor 1.

Refer to page

12.

172

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the HDD has any available disk space.

Refer to p. 136.

• Check if the recording setup is set to ON.

• Check the schedule settings.

Refer to p. 111.

Refer to p. 119.

Refer to p. 112.

Cannot start recording.

• Check the recording priority settings.

• When the setting menu of a matrix switcher is displayed

by a non-interlace signal, the setting menu may be unable

to function normally.

Since the setting menu of the matrix switcher is displayed

by a non-interlace signal, recording or displaying the

setup menu of a matrix switcher with this unit may be

impossible.

Cannot record or display the

SETUP MENU of a matrix

switcher.

–

Refer to p. 28.

• Check if images have been recorded on the HDD.

• Can the users record images?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Refer to p. 107

and 110.

Cannot playback images.

• Can the users display camera images on the monitors?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

Refer to p. 107

and 110.

• Check the connection of the camera you are going to con-

trol. Coaxial communication control is available for cam-

eras connected to VIDEO IN 1 to 8 for the WJ-HD316A (1

to 6 for the WJ-HD309A).

Refer to p. 73.

• Check if the camera you are going to control is a combina-

tion camera.

Refer to p. 73.

Refer to p. 130.

Cannot control cameras.

• Check the camera control settings.

Refer to p. 107

and 110.

• Can the users control the cameras?

Check the level settings of the users logging in.

• Check the BUSY indicator. When the indicator is lighting,

a higher-priority user is controlling the cameras. You can-

not control the cameras until the indicator goes out.

Refer to p. 10.

173

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if alarm input signals are properly input to the

ALARM or ALARM/CONTROL at the rear panel.

Refer to p. 86

and 90.

Alarm operations are not acti-

vated.

Refer to p. 90.

• Check the settings of the ALARM connector.

Refer to p. 120

and 121.

• Check if the operation mode is set to ALARM (alarm

mode).

• Check the camera connections.

Refer to p. 73.

"VIDEO LOSS" appears on the

monitor.

• If the camera connections are proper, refer to the dealer.

Cable wires may be snapped or the unit may have some

trouble.

–

• Check if the ambient operating temperature is between

+5°C and +45 °C (41 °F - 113 °F).

• When the inside of unit exceeds 45 °C (113 °F), "THER-

MAL" may appear even within the ambient temperature

mentioned above.

Refer to p. 5

and 15.

"THERMAL" appears on the

monitor.

• If "THERMAL" frequently appear on monitors, refer to the

dealer. The unit may have some trouble.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been charged

enough. If not so, supply power to the unit for 48 hours or

more to recharge the battery.

Refer to p. 5.

The clock does not keep cor-

rect time.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been worn out.

The battery life is approx. 5 years. (The battery lifetime

may differ depending on the condition of the environ-

ment.)

• Check if HDDs were added or removed. If so, the HDD

DISK MENU will be displayed automatically.

Refer to p. 142.

When you turn on the power of

the unit, the HDD DISK MENU

is displayed.

• If the HDD DISK MENU is displayed even though no

HDDs were added or removed, refer to the dealer. The

HDD may have some trouble.

–

174

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if "Disk End Mode" is set to STOP.

Refer to p. 136.

The available disk space of

HDD is not displayed.

–

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

• Check if the "Disk End Mode" is set to STOP.

Refer to p. 136.

The available disk space of

HDD is not displayed on the

right bar.

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

–

Refer to the

• Check the network settings of the unit and PC.

Network Setup

Instructions (PDF).

Cannot establish a connection

via the network.

• Check the host registration setting. When host authentica-

tion is set to ON, you cannot establish the connection

from computers other than the PC registered as the host.

Refer to p. 108

and 133.

Response or Image update

takes time.

–

• Check if the network is crowded.

When the unit fails to find all of the connected extension units

(WJ-HDE300 series) previously mounted for the following rea-

sons, it may take time to start up because the unit will be

restarted while displaying the splash startup screen. They are

normal operations.

Rebooting of the unit occurs

while displaying the splash

startup screen.

–

• When dedicated cables connecting the unit and the extension

units are not firmly connected or detached

• When all of the extension units previously mounted are

disconnected

Inspect the power cord, power plug and connectors periodically.

The power cord insulation is

damaged.

• The power cord, plug and connectors are worn out. This may result in electric

shock or a fire. Unplug the power plug from the AC outlet immediately, and

refer to qualified service personnel.

The power cord, plug and con-

nectors get hot during use.

The power cord gets hot when

bent or stretched.

175

SPECIFICATION

General

Power source:

120 V AC, 60 Hz

75 W

Power consumption

Ambient operating

temperature

+5°C to +45°C (41 °F - 113 °F)

Ambient operating

humidity

Less than 85 %

Dimensions

420 mm (W) X 88 mm (H) X 350 mm (D) [16-9/16" (W) X 3-7/16" (H) X

13-3/4" (D)] (excluding rubber feet and projections)

Weight

9 kg (19.8 lbs.)

Input/Output

Video

Video input connectors

WJ-HD316A: 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, vertical timing pulse multiplexed,

x8 (1 to 8 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD309A: 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, vertical timing pulse multiplexed,

x6 (1 to 6 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD316A: 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, with auto-termination loop-thru,

x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD309A: 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, with auto-termination loop-thru,

x3 (7 to 9 CH) (BNC)

Cascade input connector 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω (BNC)

Video output connectors

WJ-HD316A: 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (1 to 8 CH)

(BNC)*

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, loop-thru output, x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

WJ-HD309A: 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (1 to 8 CH)

(BNC)*

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, loop-thru output, x1 (9 CH) (BNC)

Monitor output connectors 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x2 (BNC)

Monitor output connector RGB output, x1 (15-pin D-sub)

(VGA)

S-video output connector Y = 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, C=0.286 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (S-video output connec-

tor)

Video output connector

(front panel)

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (RCA pin)

Audio

Audio input connectors

Audio output connectors

Expansion connector

Copy connectors

–10 dBv, 10 KΩ, unbalanced, x4 (RCA pin)

–10 dBv, 600 Ω, unbalanced, x2 (RCA pin)

Others

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x1

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x2

Control connectors

Emergency recording input*², available space warning output*³(for

devices connected to copy connectors), HDD trouble output*³, camera

trouble output*³, trouble output*³, electricity failure recovery completion

output*⁴, time adjust input/output*⁵, sequence switching input/output*⁵,

electricity failure detection input*², external recording mode switching*²

(25-pin D-sub) , +5 V output *⁶

Alarm port

WJ-HD316A: 1 to 16 CH alarm input*², 1 to 16 alarm output*³, alarm

recovery input*², alarm suspension input*⁵(25-pin D-sub)

WJ-HD309A: 1 to 9 CH alarm input*², 1 to 9 alarm output*³, alarm recov-

ery input*², alarm suspension input*⁵(25-pin D-sub)

176

Others

RS-485 ports

DATA ports

RS-485 (full duplex/half duplex*⁷), x2 (RJ-11)

RS-485, x2 (RJ-11)

SERIAL connector

Ethernet port

RS-232C, x1 (9-pin D-sub)

10 Base-T/100 Base-Tx (RJ-45)

When power is not supplied, the video output signal was not sent from the unit even if a video input signal is supplied.

Non-voltage N.O. Contact, 50 KΩ, +5 V pull-up

Open collector output, maximum under conditions of 24 V DC and 100 mA or less

High (+12 V, 6.3 mA)

Either of *2 or *3 above (depending on the settings).

200 mA at maximum

Changeable with the mode switch

STANDARD ACCESSORIES

CD-ROM* ............................................................................ 1

Operating Instructions (this manual) .................................. 1

Warranty ............................................................................. 1

The following are for installation:

Power Cord ......................................................................... 1

Rack Mounting Bracket ...................................................... 2

Screw for Rack Mounting Bracket ...................................... 4

Hard Disk Drive Fixing Screw ............................................. 4

*The following are included on the CD-ROM:

Viewer software

Plug-in software

Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

Network Setup Instructions (PDF)

Operation Using The System Controllers (PDF)

Administrator Console (Software)

177

PANASONIC CANADA INC.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga,

Panasonic Digital Communications & Security Company

Unit of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America

Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010

PANASONIC SALES COMPANY

DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC OF PUERTO RICO INC.

San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave. KM. 9.5 Carolina,

P.R. 00985 (809)750-4300

Security Systems Group

www.panasonic.com/cctv

Executive Office: One Panasonic Way 3E-7, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Zone Office

Eastern: One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7303

Central: 1707 N.Randal Road, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5205

Western: 6550 Katella Ave., Cypress, CA 90630 (714) 373-7840

N0904-1114

3TR003183BAA

Printed in Japan

ADDENDUM

This document contains the additional instructions described in the Operating Instructions (book), the Network Operating

Instruction (PDF) and Network Setup Instructions (PDF) to operate the additional features. Refer to the following for the corre-

sponding pages and descriptions.

File Size Calculation before Starting Copying

Before starting copying recorded images manually on the HDD copy area or the external recording device, it is possible to cal-

culate approximate size of the recorded images to be copied.

Notes:

Operating Instructions (book)

• When the available disk space is displayed as "--KB",

check the following.

After completing the settings for data copy in step 3, move

• Check if "Disk End Mode" is set to "STOP". (page

Add this step between steps 3 and 4. (page 53)

the cursor to the SIZE button using the arrows button and

press the SET button to start the recorded images size cal-

136)

culation.

• When the available disk space is displayed as "**KB",

check the following.

(Skip this step when it is unnecessary to calculate approxi-

mate size.)

• Check if the selected COPY DRIVE is correct.

• Check if the media is formatted correctly.

• When the size of the recorded images is displayed as

"00KB", check the following.

• Check if at least one camera channel is selected or

if images had surely recorded in the designated

time range.

• When failed to calculate size of the recorded images

because of the HDD access error, etc., the message

"Failed!" will be displayed.

If this message is displayed repeatedly, contact the

dealer.

When calculation is complete, the following window will be

displayed.

COPY DRIVE: Destination disk

SIZE: Size of the recorded images to be copied

Available disc space: Available disk space size of the

destination disk

When the available disk space is smaller than the size of

the recorded images, the recorded images will be copied

corresponding to the available disk space.

To display to the DATA COPY window again, press the

SETUP/ESC button.

• Check if at least one camera channel is selected or

if images had surely recorded in the designated

time range.

Network Operating Instructions (PDF)

Add this step between steps 5 and 6. (page 50)

After completing the settings for data copy in step 3, move

the cursor to the SIZE button using the arrows button and

press the SET button to start the recorded images size cal-

culation.

• When it fails to calculate size of the recorded images

because of the HDD access error, etc., the message

"Failed!" will be displayed.

If this message is displayed repeatedly, contact the

dealer.

(When it is unnecessary to calculate approximate size, skip

this step.)

When calculation is complete, the following window will be

displayed.

Copy Drive: Destination disk

SIZE: Size of the recorded images to be copied

Available disk space: Available disk space size of the

destination disk

When the available disk space is smaller than the size of

the recorded images, the recorded images will be copied

corresponding to the available disk space.

Click the CLOSE button to close the calculation result win-

dow.

Notes:

• When the available disk space is displayed as "**KB",

check the following.

• Check if "Disk End Mode" is set to "STOP". (Refer to

the Network Setup Instructions.)

• Check if the selected COPY DRIVE is correct.

• Check if the media is formatted correctly.

• When the size of the recorded images is displayed as

"00KB", check the following.

Updated troubleshooting information relating to "Live

Video Quality"

Add the following to "Cause/solution" for the symptom "The

image is not being refreshed.".

Live Video Quality

Depending on the traffic of the network, there might be diffi-

culties in displaying images.

To improve this matter, changing the parameter of "Live

Video Quality" becomes possible.

When the bandwidth of the network is not broad enough,

select "NQB (QVGA)" for "Live Video Quality" and select

appropriate rate for "NW BANDWIDTH CONTROL" accord-

ing to the current bandwidth.

Operating Instructions (book)

Refer to pages 70 and 93 for further information.

Correct the description on page 133 as follows.

Updated description about "Live Video Quality"

Select "FQB" or "NQB" for "Live Video Quality".

FQB: High quality (default)

NQB (QVGA): Low quality (Suitable when there are difficul-

ties in displaying images depending on the traffic of the

network)

Note: When "NQB" is selected, image display area size in

the browser window will become smaller.

Network Setup Instructions (PDF)

Correct the illustration/description on pages 92 and 93 as

follows.

Updated image of the "Network Setup 1" menu

Updated description about "Live Video Quality"

Select "FQB" or "NQB (QVGA)" for "Live Video Quality".

FQB: High quality (default)

NQB (QVGA): Low quality (Suitable when there are difficul-

ties in displaying images depending on the traffic of the

network)

Note: When "NQB (QVGA)" is selected, image display area

size in the browser window will become smaller.

P NM0805-0

3TU001442AAA

Printed in Japan

Intel Cpu Xeon BX80635E51660V2 User Manual
Intel D945GSEJT User Manual
Intel DDR400 PC3200 User Manual
JVC AV 29WS21 User Manual
KitchenAid KGCK366 User Manual
Philips 28PT4755_ User Manual
Philips 28PW6518 User Manual
Philips 29PT5683 User Manual
Philips 107E63 User Manual
Philips Brilliance 200PW8ES User Manual